You are on page 1of 173

Service

Maintenance
Amarok 2011 ➤
Edition 10.2012 agen
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
olksw not
byV gu
ara
ed
ris nte
ho eo
aut ra
ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

Service Department. Technical Information


Service
Maintenance

Heading
1. Engine list
2. General rules of cleanliness
3. Service work
4. General
5. Descriptions of work
6. Exhaust emissions test
7. Glossary

n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
ir se tee
tho
u or
a ac
ss
ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
rrectness o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.
Technical information should always be available to the foremen and mechanics, because their
careful and constant adherence to the instructions is essential to ensure vehicle road-worthiness and
safety. In addition, the normal basic safety precautions for working on motor vehicles must, as a
matter of course, be observed.

All rights reserved.


No reproduction without prior agreement from publisher.

Copyright © 2012 Volkswagen AG, Wolfsburg D3E8027339B


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Contents
1 Engine list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . w. a.g.en. A. G. ..V.o.lk.sw. a.g.e.n .AG
. .do. e.s. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1
olks no
2 General rules of cleanliness ed.by. V. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . t.g.ua. ra. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3
ris nte
2.1 Rules of cleanliness during tho work with information material “Maintenance e o Manual” . . . . . . 3
u r
2.2 Rules of cleanliness during ss
a work with information material “Maintenance aManual” c ...... 10
2.3 Rules of cleanliness during work with information material “Maintenance Manual” . . . . . . 16

ce
le
un

pt
an
2.4 Rules of cleanliness during work with information material “Maintenance Manual” . . . . . . 17

d
itte

y li
2.5 rm
Rules of cleanliness during work with information material “Maintenance manual for heating,

ab
pe

ility
ventilation and air conditioning system” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 18
ot

wit
, is n

2.6 Rules of cleanliness during work with information material “Maintenance Manual - Body”

h re
........................................................................ 28
hole

spec
2.7 Rules of cleanliness during work with information material “Maintenance Manual - Body”
es, in part or in w

........................................................................ 35

t to the co
3 Service work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38
3.1 Information reference flexible or fixed service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

rrectness of i
3.2 Service tables . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 40
l purpos

3.3 Scopes of service . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50


4 General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

nform
ercia

4.1 Vehicle identification number (chassis number) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59


m

4.2 Vehicle data sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 59

a
com

tio
4.3 Severe operating conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

n in
r
te o

4.4 Engine code and engine number . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60

thi
s
iva

do
4.5 Countries with high levels of dust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 60
r
rp

cum
4.6 Sticker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 62
fo

en
ng

t.
yi
4.7 Entries in service schedule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63
Co
Cop py
t. rig
5 Descriptions of work . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
gh
64
ht
pyri by
Vo
5.1 Lifting the vehicle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 65
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote
5.2 Swivel joints: Visual check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 79
AG.

5.3 Reading ash mass (saturation level) of diesel particulate filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80


5.4 Battery: Check battery terminal clamps for secure seating . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81
5.5 Battery: Perform visual check and check magic eye . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.6 Removing relay for battery disconnection (if fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84
5.7 Front passenger front airbag: Check key switch and “On/Off function” . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88
5.8 Checking tyres: Condition, wear pattern, tyre pressure, tread depth . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89
5.9 Brake system: Perform visual check for leaks and damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92
5.10 Thickness of brake pads and condition of front brake discs and rear drum brake linings:
check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 93
5.11 Brake system and shock absorbers: Perform visual check for leaks and damage . . . . . . 95
5.12 Brake fluid: Change . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95
5.13 Brake fluid level: Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100
5.14 Climatronic: Set temperature to 22 °C . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101
5.15 Window regulators: Check positioning (open and close functions) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.16 Vehicle diagnosis tester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102
5.17 Performing vehicle system test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 104
5.18 Four-wheel drive: Insert fuse . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107
5.19 Protective bellows: Visual check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.20 Dust and pollen filter: Clean housing and renew filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110
5.21 Poly V-belt: Check condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111
5.22 Poly V-belt: Renew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 112
5.23 Fuel filter: Renew (diesel engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113
5.24 Fuel system: Bleed (diesel engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.25 Fuel filter: Drain water (diesel engine) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 114
5.26 Cooling system: Check frost protection and coolant level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 115
5.27 Air filter: Clean housing and renew filter element . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118
5.28 Air filter with saturation indicator in dash panel insert: . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 121

Contents i
. Volkswagen AG
gen AG does
swa
Amarok 2011 y V➤
olk not
gu
b ara
Maintenance
rised
- Edition 10.2012 nte
ho eo
aut ra
s c
5.29 s Resetting programmed values in engine control unit .............................. 121

ce
e
nl

5.30 Engine oil level: Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

pt
du

an
itte

5.31 Engine oil: Drain or extract; renew oil filter and replenish engine oil . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

y li
erm

ab
5.32 Engine and components in engine compartment (from above and below): Perform visual

ility
ot p

check for leaks and damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 126

wit
, is n

h re
5.33 Bonnet catch: Clean, ensure attachment is secure and lubricate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127
hole

spec
5.34 Check breakdown set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 128
es, in part or in w

5.35 Performing road test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

t to the co
5.36 Wheel securing bolts: Tighten to specified torque . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130
5.37 Reading radio code . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 131

rrectness of i
5.38 Radio / radio navigation system: Enter anti-theft coding PIN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133
5.39 Radio navigation system: Insert navigation CD/DVD and perform update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134
l purpos

5.40 Timing chain: Renew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134


5.41 Windscreen wash/wipe system and headlight washer system: Check function and settings

nf
ercia

o
........................................................................ 134

rm
m

atio
5.42 Windscreen wiper blades: Check park position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 137
om

n in
c

5.43 Headlight adjustment: Check, if necessary adjust . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138


or

thi
e

5.44 Service interval display: Reset . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141


t

sd
iva

o
5.45 Service interval display: Adapt (export) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

5.46 Track rod ends: Check clearance, security and boots . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
en
ng

t.
yi Co
5.47 Power assisted steering: Check fluid level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144
Cop py
ht. rig
5.48 Doors: Grease door arrester . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
rig ht
py by
o Vo
5.49 Paint: Perform visual check for damage and corrosion, interior and exterior when doors and
by c lksw
cted agen
bonnet/rear lid/flaps are open . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145
Prote AG.

5.50 Protective foil: Remove (if fitted) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146


5.51 Underbody protection: Perform visual check for damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.52 Clock: Set to correct time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146
5.53 Camshaft drive toothed belt and toothed belt tensioning roller: Renew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.54 Camshaft drive toothed belt: Check condition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.55 Toothed belt for water pump: renew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.56 Toothed belt for balancer shaft: renew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148
5.57 Spark plugs: Renew . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 149
5.58 Removing and installing skid plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150
5.59 Steering: Check bellows for leaks and damage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 151
6 Exhaust emissions test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.1 General information for exhaust emissions test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152
6.2 Exhaust emissions test for petrol engines with engine code CFPA . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153
6.3 Exhaust emissions test for diesel engines with engine codes CDBA, CDCA . . . . . . . . . . 160
6.4 Exhaust emissions test with OBD . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163
7 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 166

ii Contents
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

1 Engine list
(VIGG000558; Edition 10.2012)
Diesel engines ⇒ page 1
Petrol engines ⇒ page 1

Diesel engines

Note

To ease the search for an engine, the engine codes are listed in
alphabetical order.

Engines: ⇒ Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel Diesel


Capacity I 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
Introduction Week 05/2010 ► Week 05/2010 ► Week Week Week 30/2012 ► Week
05/2012 ► 22/2012 ► 05/2012 ►
Engine code CDBA CDCA CNEA CNFA CNFB CSHA
No. of cylinders/ 4/4 4/4 4/4 4/4 4/4 4/4
valves per cylin‐
der
Output kW at 90/3750 120/4000 132/4000 90/3750 103/3500 132/4000
rpm
Torque Nm at 340/1750-2500 400/1500-2000 400/1500 - 340/1600 - 340/1600-2250 420/1750
rpm 2250 2000
Bore ∅ mm 81.0 81.0 81.0 81.0 81.0 81.0
Stroke mm 95.5 95.5 95.5 95.5 95.5 95.5
Compression 16.5 16.5 16.0 16.0 16.0 16.0
ratio AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
ksw
Injection/igni‐ TDI common rail TDI common by V rail TDI com‐
ol
TDI com‐not
guTDI common
ara
rail TDI com‐
tion rise
d mon rail mon rail nte mon rail
tho eo
Diesel particu‐ yes/no1) s a yes/no
u 1) yes/no 1) yes/no 1) yes/no
ra
c
1) yes/no1)
late filter s
ce
e
nl

pt

Camshaft drive Toothed belt Toothed belt Toothed Toothed Toothed belt Toothed
du

an
itte

belt belt belt


y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re

Petrol engines
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

Engines: ⇒ Petrol
t to the co

Capacity I 2.0
Introduction Week 42/2010 ►
rrectness of i

Engine code CFPA


l purpos

No. of cylinders/valves per cylinder 4/4


Output kW at 1 rpm 118/3800-5500
nf
ercia

or

Torque Nm at rpm 300/1600-3750


m
m

atio
m

Bore ∅ mm 82.5
o

n in
or c

Stroke mm 92.8
thi
te

sd
iva

Compression ratio 9.6


o
r
rp

cu
o

Injection/ignition Motronic MED 17.5 TSI turbocharg‐


f

en
ng

t.
yi
er
Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
1
cted agen
Prote AG.
1. Engine list
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Engines: ⇒ Petrol
Capacity I 2.0
Introduction Week 42/2010 ►
Engine code CFPA
Camshaft drive Chain

n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
ir se tee
tho
u or
a ac
ss
ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
rrectness o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

2 1. Engine list
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

2 General rules of cleanliness

Note

Only some examples are given in this document. Not all concrete
situations are covered.

♦ Before disconnecting, thoroughly clean connections and sur‐


rounding areas.
♦ Place removed parts onto a clean surface and cover. Use only
lint-free cloths.
♦ If the repair is not performed immediately, carefully cover or
seal opened components. agen
AG. Volkswagen AG d
o w es n
t gu olks o
♦ Fit only clean parts. Removedb
y V spare parts from their packaging ar
only immediately before rise their use. Do not use parts that have ante
ho eo
been kept unpackaged
au
t
(for example in toolboxes or similar). ra
c
ss
♦ If a system is open, avoid working with compressed air if pos‐

ce
le
un

pt
sible. If possible, do not move the vehicle.

an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
⇒ “2.1 Rules of cleanliness during work with information material
pe

ility
Maintenance Manual ”, page 3
ot

wit
, is n

h re
⇒ “2.2 Rules of cleanliness during work with information material
hole

Maintenance Manual ”, page 10

spec
es, in part or in w

⇒ “2.3 Rules of cleanliness during work with information material

t to the co
Maintenance Manual ”, page 16
⇒ “2.4 Rules of cleanliness during work with information material
rrectness of i
Maintenance Manual ”, page 17
l purpos

⇒ “2.5 Rules of cleanliness during work with information material


Maintenance manual for heating, ventilation and air conditioning
system ”, page 18
nform
ercia

⇒ “2.6 Rules of cleanliness during work with information material


m

a
com

ti

Maintenance Manual - Body ”, page 28


on in
r
te o

thi

⇒ “2.7 Rules of cleanliness during work with information material


s
iva

Maintenance Manual - Body ”, page 35


do
r
rp

cum
fo

2.1 Rules of cleanliness during work with in‐


en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
formation material “Maintenance Man‐
C py
t. rig
gh ht
yri
ual”
p by
o Vo
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Universal cloth -VAS 6385-
♦ Non-fibrous lint-free cloths
♦ Soft commercially available sponge
♦ Commercially available wire brush (brass or plastic)
♦ Commercially available vacuum cleaner

2. General rules of cleanliness 3


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Cleaning automatic dipstick ⇒ page 4


Cleaning filling device -VAS 6542- ⇒ page 5
Clean sealing surfaces on oil filter housing and oil filter cover
⇒ page 5
Cleaning sliding window seals ⇒ page 5
Cleaning electro-hydraulic 3-way tipper ⇒ page 5
Cleaning bonnet lock ⇒ page 6
Cleaning guide rails of sliding sunroof ⇒ page 6
Cleaning threads of threaded connections ⇒ page 7
. Volkswagen AG
a gen AG does
Cleaning holes in rear axle for checking and draining
Vol
ksw not
gu
⇒ page 7 ed by ara
nte
is
or eo
Cleaning fuel filter housing and fuel filter
au connections
th ra
⇒ page 7 ss c

ce
le
un

pt
Cleaning fuel filter housing ⇒ page 7

an
d
itte

y li
erm

Cleaning dipstick ⇒ page 8

ab
ility
ot p

Cleaning padded surface and the foamed surface of the airbag

wit
is n

unit ⇒ page 8

h re
ole,

spec
Cleaning filler neck of reducing-agent tank ⇒ page 8
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
Cleaning rear door hinges ⇒ page 8
Cleaning holes for checking and draining in manual gearbox

rrectne
⇒ page 9
Cleaning spray jets for headlight cleaning system ⇒ page 9

ss o
Cleaning dust and pollen filter housing ⇒ page 9
cial p

f inform
Cleaning holes for filling and draining in transfer box
mer

⇒ page 9
atio
om

n
c

Cleaning holes for filling and draining in front-axle differential


i
or

n thi
e

⇒ page 10
t

sd
iva

o
pr

Cleaning water drain hole in floor area of sliding door


um
r
fo

en
ng

⇒ page 10 yi
t.
Co
op py
2.1.1 Cleaning automatic dipstick
t. C rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
– Pull out automatic dipstick and wipe with a clean, non-fibrous Prote
cted AG.
agen
lint-free cloth or the universal cloth -VAS 6385- , then push
dipstick back in as far as it will go.

4 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

2.1.2 Cleaning filling device -VAS 6542-


– Open both cut-off taps -3- and -6- and clean or rinse all parts
of filling device for AdBlue -VAS 6542- under running water.

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
2.1.3 Clean sealing surfaces on oil filter hous‐
ot

wit
, is n

h re
ing and oil filter cover
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

– Clean sealing surfaces on threaded cap and on oil filter hous‐

t to the co
ing with a non-fibrous, lint-free cloth (for example universal
cloth -VAS 6385- ).
rrectness of i

Note
l purpos

♦ Ensure that no engine oil comes into contact with coolant ho‐
nform
ercia

ses or other engine parts or painted parts. If necessary, clean


hoses immediately.
m

a
com

tio

♦ Observe disposal regulations!


n in
r
te o

thi
s
iva

do

2.1.4 Cleaning sliding window seals


r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
– Remove all dirt and dust from the seals of the sliding window op
yi Co
and from the contact surfaces of the sliding window seals, us‐
C py
t. rig
gh
ing a soft sponge or a non-fibrous and lint-free cloth (for
ht
pyri by
Vo
example universal cloth -VAS 6385- ) and normal rinsing wa‐
co lksw
by
cted agen
ter. Prote AG.

Note

After cleaning, treat the sliding window seals using a commer‐


cially available anti-soiling rubber care product.

2.1.5 Cleaning electro-hydraulic 3-way tipper


– Before undoing connections, thoroughly clean them and their
surroundings with a non-fibrous, lint-free cloth (for example
universal cloth -VAS 6385- ).
– Place removed parts on a clean surface and cover them with
a non-fibrous, lint-free cloth (for example universal cloth -VAS
6385- ).
– Carefully cover opened components with a non-fibrous, lint-
free cloth (for example universal cloth -VAS 6385- ).

2. General rules of cleanliness 5


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note

♦ Only install clean parts.


♦ Do not take replacement parts out of their packaging until im‐
mediately before they are installed.
♦ Do not use parts that have been kept unpackaged (for exam‐
ple in toolboxes etc.).

2.1.6 Cleaning bonnet lock AG. Volkswagen AG d


agen oes
lksw not
– Clean bonnet catch -arrow- with cleaning solution -D 009 401 d by V o gu
ara
04- and, for example, a universal cloth -VAS 6385- . Also use orise nte
eo
“compressed air” to clean if necessary. aut
h
ra
ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

a
2.1.7 Cleaning guide rails of sliding sunroof
com

tion in
r
te o

thi
– Clean guide rails of sliding sunroof -arrows- with a non-fibrous,

s
iva

lint-free cloth (for example universal cloth -VAS 6385- ) or a

do
r
rp

c
soft sponge.

um
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
Note rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
After cleaning the guide rails, lubricate them again with grease - Prote AG.
G 000 450 02- .

6 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

2.1.8 Cleaning threads of threaded connec‐


tions
– Clean threads of threaded connections -1- (shown here for
Crafter) with a commercially available wire brush (brass or
plastic) and, if necessary, remove dirt such as “rust” or “un‐
derbody sealing compound”.

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
aut ra
2.1.9 Cleaning holes for filling and draining in ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
transfer box
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
– Clean surroundings of oil filler plug -1- and oil drainage plug

ility
ot p

-2- using a commercially available wire brush, if necessary

wit
, is n

using compressed air as well.

h re
hole

spec
– Cover magnet of oil drainage plug with a non-fibrous, lint-free
es, in part or in w

cloth (for example universal cloth -VAS 6385- ).

t to the co
Note

rrectness of i
Observe disposal regulations!
l purpos

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
2.1.10 Cleaning fuel filter housing and fuel filter
om

n in
c

connections
or

thi
te

sd
iva

o
– Remove dirt from fuel filter housing and fuel filter connections
r
rp

cu
o

m
with a non-fibrous, lint-free cloth (for example universal cloth
f

en
ng

t.
-VAS 6385- ), if necessary using a wire brush as well (brass
yi Co
op py
or plastic). t. C rig
gh ht
pyri by
– Cover surroundings of fuel filter connections with a non-fi‐
o Vo
by c lksw
cted
brous, lint-free cloth (for example universal cloth -VAS 6385- ).
agen
Prote AG.

Note

♦ Ensure that no diesel fuel contacts coolant hoses. If necessa‐


ry, clean hoses immediately.
♦ Observe disposal regulations!

2.1.11 Cleaning fuel filter housing


– Remove air filter element.
– Then, clean filter housing with a non-fibrous, lint-free cloth or
the universal cloth -VAS 6385- , a vacuum cleaner or with
compressed air.

2. General rules of cleanliness 7


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note

♦ Before blowing out the air filter housing with compressed air,
cover components that conduct air such as the air mass meter,
air inlet pipes etc. with a clean cloth or with blue blotting paper
in order to prevent malfunctions.
♦ When replacing air filter, make sure that no dirt gets into intake
hose, air mass meter -G70- and air filter cover.

2.1.12 Cleaning dipstick


– Pull out dipstick and wipe with a clean, non-fibrous lint-free
cloth or the universal cloth -VAS 6385- , then push dipstick
back in as far as it will go.

2.1.13 Cleaning padded AG. Volksurface


swagen AG and the
agen does
foamed
by Vol surface of the airbagotunit
ksw n
gu
a
ed ran
oris tee
h
ut
aWARNING
or
ac
ss
ce
e
nl

pt

It is not permissible to cover or attach stickers to the padded


du

an
itte

surface of the steering wheel and the foamed surface of the


y li
erm

ab

airbag or to modify them in some other way.


ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

– Remove dirt from padded surface of steering wheel and the


spec

foamed surface of the airbag with a dry cloth or a cloth mois‐


es, in part or in w

tened with water.


t to the co

2.1.14 Cleaning filler neck of reducing-agent


rrectness of i

tank
l purpos

– Clean filler neck of reducing-agent tank with a lint-free cotton


cloth moistened with water or with a non-fibrous, lint-free cloth
(for example universal cloth -VAS 6385- ).
nform
ercia

2.1.15 Cleaning rear door hinges


m

at
om

ion
c

in t
r

– Remove dirt from door hinges -arrows- with a non-fibrous, lint-


o

his
e

free cloth (for example universal cloth -VAS 6385- ).


at

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

8 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

2.1.16 Cleaning holes for filling and draining in


transfer box
– Clean surroundings of oil filler plug -1- and oil drainage plug
-2- using a commercially available wire brush, if necessary
using compressed air as well.
– Cover magnet of oil drainage plug with a non-fibrous, lint-free
cloth (for example universal cloth -VAS 6385- ).

Note

Observe disposal regulations!

2.1.17 Cleaning spray jets for headlight clean‐


ing system
– Flush removed spray jets in direction opposite to spraying di‐
rection and, if necessary, use compressed air to clean them
in spraying direction and opposite direction.

Caution

♦ Never use items to clean the spray jets!


♦ Never use a needle or a similar object to adjust the spray
jets, otherwise the water passages in the spray jet will be
damaged!

2.1.18 Cleaning dust and pollen filter housing


– Clean the surroundings of the dust and pollen filter with a vac‐
uum cleaner, for example, or a non-fibrous, lint-free cloth oren AG. Volkswagen AG
the universal cloth -VAS 6385- . olks
wag does
not
yV gu
db ara
– Remove dust and pollen filter. rise nte
tho eo
– Before installing the dust and pollen of au
filter,ssclean the shaft
ra
c
the heating and air-conditioning unit with a vacuum cleaner or
ce
le
un

pt

a non-fibrous, lint-free cloth or the universal cloth -VAS 6385- .


an
d
itte

y li

2.1.19 Cleaning holes for filling and draining in


rm

ab
pe

ility

transfer box
ot

wit
, is n

h re
hole

– Remove dirt from the surroundings of the filler plug -1- and
spec

drainage plug -2- with a commercially available brush or with


es, in part or in w

t to the co

a non-fibrous, lint-free cloth (for example universal cloth -VAS


6385- ).
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

a
com

tion in
r
te o

thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
yri by

9
cop Vo
by lksw
Prote
cted AG. 2. General rules of cleanliness
agen
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

2.1.20 Cleaning holes for filling and draining in


front-axle differential lkswagen AG. Volkswagen AG does n
o ot g
yV ua
– Remove dirt from the surroundings ed of the filler plug -1- and
b ran
ris
drainage plug -2- with a commercially
tho available brush or with tee
or
au example universal cloth -VAS
a non-fibrous, lint-free clothss(for ac
6385- ).

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
2.1.21 Cleaning water drain hole in floor area
l purpos

of sliding door
– Remove dirt from water drain holes -2- with a commercially

nf
ercia

o
available brush or a non-fibrous, lint-free cloth (for example

rm
m

universal cloth -VAS 6385- ).

atio
om

n in
c

– Poke through water drain holes -2- e.g. with an appropriate


or

thi
e

cable tie -1- and, if necessary, remove dirt with a vacuum


t

sd
iva

cleaner.

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

2.2 Rules of cleanliness during work with in‐


formation material “Maintenance Man‐
ual”
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Ultrasonic cleaning device -VAS 6418-
♦ Cleaning fluid -VAS 6418/2-
♦ Mounting plate for injection modules -VAS 6418/1-
♦ Universal cloth -VAS 6385-
♦ Nylon brush -T10133/4-
♦ Commercially available paintbrush

10 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Cleaning sealing flange on pulley side ⇒ page 11


Cleaning work on fuel tank ⇒ page 11
Cleaning work on fuel pressure sender -G247- ⇒ page 11
Cleaning work on air mass meter -G70- ⇒ page 12
Cleaning work on fuel pressure regulating valve -N276-
⇒ page 12
Cleaning work on intake manifold flap housing ⇒ page 12
Cleaning work on holes of injectors ⇒ page 13
Cleaning work on injectors ⇒ page 13
Cleaning work on high-pressure lines ⇒ page 14
Cleaning work on the Teflon seal of the injectors ⇒ page 14
Cleaning work on throttle valve module -J338- ⇒ page 14
Cleaning work on a used injector (piezo injector) ⇒ page 15
Cleaning work when glow plugs are removed or installed
⇒ page 15

2.2.1 Cleaning sealing flange on pulley side


– Remove sealant residue from sealing flange with a rotating
plastic brush (wear protective goggles).
– Cover sealing surfaces with a commercially available brake
cleaner and a non-fibrous, lint-free cloth (for example univer‐
sal cloth -VAS 6385- ).

Note

Sealing surfaces must be free of oil and grease.


AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
aut ra
ss c
ce
e
nl

pt
du

2.2.2 Cleaning work on fuel tank


an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

Note
h re
hole

spec

♦ Whenever work is done on the fuel system, ensure cleanliness


es, in part or in w

and do the work carefully.


t to the co

♦ The fuel system reacts sensitively to the ingress of dirt.


rrectness of i

– Clean inside of fuel tank with a lint-free cloth.


l purpos

2.2.3 Cleaning work on fuel pressure sender -


G247-
nform
mercia

at

– Before removing the fuel pressure sender -G247- , clean the


om

io

threaded area around it (e.g. with a commercially available


n
c

in t
r

degreaser).
o

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

2. General rules of cleanliness 11


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
Note ir se
d ran
tee
tho
u or
a ac
♦ Do not allow dirt to get into the high-pressure accumulator
ss

ce
le
hole.

un

pt
an
d
itte
♦ Do not allow any cleaning agent to get into the connector,

y li
rm

ab
clean it carefully.

pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n
– Dry the fuel pressure sender -G247- .

h re
hole

spec
– Unscrew and remove fuel pressure sender -G247- -1-.

es, in part or in w

t to the co
Note

rrectness of i
Seal the high-pressure accumulator hole immediately with a suit‐
l purpos

able bung in order to prevent the ingress of dirt.

nform
mercia

a
com

tion in
r
te o

thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
2.2.4 Cleaning work on air mass meter -G70-
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
– Check intake port for dirt as far as the air filter element.
C py
t. rig
gh ht
yri by
If any dirt is found. cop Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
– If there is any salt residue, dirt or leaves in the air filter housing,
wash the housing out with a non-fibrous, lint-free cloth (for ex‐
ample universal cloth -VAS 6385- ) or vacuum cleaner.

2.2.5 Cleaning work on fuel pressure regulat‐


ing valve -N276-
– Before removing the regulating valve, clean it with a commer‐
cially available degreaser, for example, or compressed air.

Note

♦ Do not allow dirt to get into the hole of the high-pressure ac‐
cumulator (fuel rail) in any circumstances.
♦ Do not allow any cleaning agent to get into the connector at
the fuel pressure regulating valve -N276- .

2.2.6 Cleaning work on intake manifold flap


housing

Note

Coking can occur in the housing of the throttle valve due to the
interplay of unfavourable factors. If coking is discovered, e.g. dur‐
ing removal of the exhaust gas recirculation valve -N18- or the
motor for the intake manifold flap -V157,- , the housing has to be
cleaned.

12 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

WARNING

Acetone is highly inflammable. Please comply with the acci‐


dent prevention regulations and the safety instructions when
handling highly inflammable fluids. Wear protective goggles
and protective clothing to avoid injury and contact with the skin.

– Remove intake manifold flap housing.


– Remove exhaust gas recirculation valve -N18- as well as the
motor for intake manifold flap -V157- .
– Thoroughly clean intake manifold flap housing, especially in
the area of the exhaust gas recirculation valve, using acetone
to DIN 53247 and a paintbrush.
– Wipe inside of intake manifold flap housing with a lint-free
cloth.
– Allow acetone to dry off completely.
– Complete the cleaned intake manifold flap housing.
– Replace seal and fit again.

2.2.7 Cleaning work on holes of injectors


– Thoroughly clean the holes of injector for cylinder 1 -N30- to
injector for cylinder 4 -N33- in the cylinder head with the nylon
brush -T10133/4- . wage
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
e ks s no
Vol t gu
d by ara
e nte
ris
utho eo
ra
a c
ss
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

2.2.8 Cleaning work on injectors


t to the co
rrectness of i

Note
l purpos

Comply with safety regulations and operating instructions for the


ultrasonic device.
nf
ercia

orm

– Ultrasonic device must have been filled with cleaning fluid -


m

atio
m

VAS 6418/2- .
o

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

Note
o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

Ultrasonic device must have been filled with cleaning agent up to


t.
yi Co
op
the upper edge of the holes (see magnifying glass).
C py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
– Insert injectors -1- into mounting plate for injection modules - Prote
cted AG.
agen
VAS 6418/1- as far as they will go -2-.

2. General rules of cleanliness 13


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Dip injectors together with mounting plate for injection mod‐


ules -VAS 6418/1- into the cleaning agent.
– Set a temperature of 50 degrees with the rotating knob -4-.
– Set a cleaning time of 30 minutes with the rotating knob -5-.
– Switch on the ultrasonic device with button -3-.

Note

The set time starts as soon as the cleaning temperature reaches


50 degrees.

2.2.9 Cleaning work on high-pressure lines


– Before removing high-pressure lines, clean their surroundings
thoroughly and all over with brake cleaner and a lint-free cloth.

2.2.10 Cleaning work on the Teflon seal of the


injectors
Volkswagen AG
– Before installing the injectors, clean holes of injectors
agen in cyl‐
AG. does
ksw
inder head thoroughly with the Nylon brushbyprovided
Vol - not
gu
ara
T10133/4- . ris
ed nte
tho eo
– Remove old seal and clean the groove
ss
au of the seal -arrow-. ra
c

ce
e

– Remove any deposits (coking) with a brass wire brush.


nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

2.2.11 Cleaning work on throttle valve module


nform
ercia

-J338-
m

at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
e

Note
at

do
priv

cum
or

Make sure that the throttle valve housing is not scratched during
f

en
ng

t.
yi
cleaning.
Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
yri by
– Remove throttle valve module -J338- . cop Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

14 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Open throttle valve by hand and block it in the open position


with a suitable object (e.g. plastic or wooden wedge) -arrow-

WARNING

Acetone is highly inflammable. Comply with the accident pre‐


vention regulations and the safety instructions when handling
highly inflammable fluids. Do not use compressed air to clean
the throttle valve. Wear protective goggles and protective
clothing to avoid injury and contact with the skin.

– Thoroughly clean intake manifold flap housing, especially in


the area -arrows- of the closed throttle valve, using acetone to
DIN 53247 and a paintbrush.
– Wipe the inside of the throttle valve housing with a lint-free
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
cloth. olks
wage es n
o V t gu
by ara
– Allow acetone to dry offricompletely
se
d and then installed the nte
cleaned throttle valveuthmodule.
o eo
ra
a c
ss

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
2.2.12 Cleaning work on a used injector (piezo
hole

spec
injector)
es, in part or in w

t to the co
Clean the sealing surface of the injectors (piezo injectors) in the
cylinder head and the injector shaft.
rrectness of i
– Use a clean cloth soaked in diesel fuel or rust remover to re‐
move soot particles on the sealing surface.
l purpos

nf

Caution
ercia

orm
m

atio

Do not use engine oil for cleaning.


om

n in
or c

Avoid causing damage to the sealing surface.


thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en

2.2.13 Cleaning work when glow plugs are re‐


ng

t.
yi Co
op
moved or installed
C py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
– Remove rough dirt in the glow plug channel in the cylinder
by lksw
cted agen
head with the help of a vacuum cleaner.
Prote AG.

– Spray brake cleaner into the glow plug channel in the cylinder
head or spray a suitable cleaning agent into the glow plug
channel.
– After allowing cleaner to work in, blow out with compressed
air.
– Then, clean glow plug channel with a a non-fibrous, lint-free
cloth moistened with oil (for example universal cloth -VAS
6385- ).

2. General rules of cleanliness 15


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

2.3 Rules of cleanliness during work with in‐


formation material “Maintenance Man‐
ual”
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Drip tray for V.A.G 1202 -V.A.G 1306/-
♦ Universal cloth -VAS 6385-
♦ Non-fibrous lint-free cloths
♦ Commercially available screw tap
Removing tyre sealant from wheel rim ⇒ page 16
Care and treatment of alloy wheels ⇒ page 16
Cleaning tyre pressure sensor/wheel rim ⇒ page 17
Cleaning work on brake system ⇒ page 17
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
2.3.1 Removing tyre sealant from bwheel
yV
olks
w
rim oes
not
gu
ara
ed nte
ris
tho eo
WARNING au ra
c
ss

ce
le
un

Do not allow tyre sealant to come into contact with eyes or skin!

pt
an
d
itte

y li
It is damaging to health and can cause eye irritation and aller‐
erm

ab
gies.

ility
ot p

wit
is n

During assembly work, wear protective gloves and goggles.

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
– Using a suitable drill or cutter, carefully make a hole in the
shoulder area of the tyre.
– Hold wheel over drip tray and allow sealant to flow out.

rrectne
– Remove tyre from wheel rim.

ss
– Clean wheel rim with a damp cloth, for example.
o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

2.3.2 Care and treatment of alloy wheels


t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
Note Prote
cted AG.
agen

After cleaning or removing adhesive residue from the wheels, the


wheels must be rinsed with water again.

16 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

2.3.3 Cleaning tyrelksw


pressure
agen AG. Volkswagsensor/wheel
en AG
does
not
rim sed b Vo gu
y ara
ri n tee
ho
aut or
ac
ss
Note

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

♦ Make sure that the tyre and the tyre pressure sensor do not

y li
erm

ab
touch each other during removal or assembly work.

ility
ot p

wit
♦ Make sure that the wheel rim and the tyre pressure sensor do
is n

h re
not come into contact with water or are blown out with com‐
ole,

spec
pressed air.
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
2.3.4 Cleaning work on brake system

rrectne
WARNING

ss
Before undoing connections, clean them and their surround‐

o
cial p

f
ings on the anti-blocking system thoroughly but do not use any

inform
aggressive cleaning agents such as brake cleaner, petrol, di‐
mer

luted fuel or similar.

atio
om

n
c

Do not blow out brake system with compressed air as the re‐

i
or

n thi
e

sulting dust is dangerous to health!


t

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
Note
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
Only use spirit to clean the brake caliper housing.
cted agen
Prote AG.

– Threaded holes into which self-locking bolts or bolts with lock‐


ing agent have been screwed must be cleaned (e.g. with a
screw tap). Otherwise, there is a danger that the bolts will
shear off when refitted.

2.4 Rules of cleanliness during work with in‐


formation material “Maintenance Man‐
ual”
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque wrench -V.A.G 1331/-
♦ Universal cloth -VAS 6385-
♦ Non-fibrous lint-free cloths
♦ Commercially available wire brush
Cleaning adhesive pad of rain sensor ⇒ page 17
Cleaning cables ⇒ page 18
Cleaning the battery terminal clamp and the battery terminal
⇒ page 18

2.4.1 Cleaning adhesive pad of rain sensor

Note

The contact surface of the rain sensor within the locking ring on
the windscreen must be free of dirt, dust and grease.

2. General rules of cleanliness 17


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Thoroughly clean contact surface with isopropanol (technical


alcohol).

2.4.2 Cleaning cables


– Clean sockets, connectors and cables with a non-fibrous, lint-
free cloth (for example universal cloth -VAS 6385- ) and con‐
tact spray G 000 700 04.

2.4.3 Cleaning the battery terminal clamp and


the battery terminal

AG. Volkswagen AG d
Note lksw
agen oes
not
Vo gu
d by ara
Do not use rust remover, orise
contact spray or grease etc. as the nte
eo
specified torque swillau be exceeded during tightening due to a lack r ac
th
of static friction in
s the thread and will cause the threaded connec‐

ce
e

tion to break.
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
– Disconnect battery.

ility
ot p

– Check battery terminal clamp and battery terminal for corro‐

wit
, is n

h re
sion or dirt.
hole

spec
– Clean the battery terminal clamp with the wire brush of the
es, in part or in w

battery terminal cleaner, using circular movements.

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum

– Clean the battery terminal with the bottom of the battery ter‐
for

en
g

minal cleaner, using circular movements.


n

t.
yi Co
Cop py
– Reconnect battery and secure the battery terminals by tight‐
t. rig
gh ht
yri
ening them to the specified torque.
p by
o Vo
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

Note

Optimum contact is ensured if the components to be screwed on


are tightened to the specified torque after cleaning.

2.5 Rules of cleanliness during work with in‐


formation material “Maintenance man‐
ual for heating, ventilation and air con‐
ditioning system”
Special tools and workshop equipment required

18 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

♦ A/C service station -VAS 6007A-

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

♦ Suction feed spray gun -V.A.G 1538-

wit
, is n

♦ A/C service station with rinsing device -VAS 6381-

h re
hole

spec
♦ A/C service station with rinsing device -VAS 6337-
es, in part or in w

t to the co
♦ Adapter case, car kit, VW/Audi -VAS 6338/1-
♦ Adapter case, commercial vehicle kit -VAS 6338/50-

rrectness of i
♦ Torque wrench -V.A.G 1783-
l purpos

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
♦ Brass wire brush (commercially available)
Prote AG.

2. General rules of cleanliness 19


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Cleaning housing covers of the Hydronic “DW5S” ⇒ page 20


AG. gen AG Volkswa
Rinsing (cleaning) refrigerant circuit agen
with do
olksw R134a refrigerant es not
V
⇒ page 20 ed
by gu
ara
is nte
or
Cleaning plug mantle on supplementary
au
th heater ⇒ page 27 eo
ra
ss c
Cleaning the evaporator with the suction feed spray gun -V.A.G

ce
e
nl

pt
1538- and spraying lance ⇒ page 27
du

an
itte

y li
Cleaning work on heat exchanger ⇒ page 27
erm

ab
ility
ot p

2.5.1 Cleaning housing covers of the Hydron‐

wit
, is n

h re
ic “DW5S”
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
Note

rrectness of i
♦ The seal (sealing film) is self-adhesive. It protects the heater
and its electronic components against the unallowed ingress
l purpos

of water.
♦ The seal (sealing film) is to be re-attached after any repair work

nf
ercia

o
and must not left off under any circumstances! For spare part,

rm
see ⇒ Electronic parts catalogue (ETKA) .
m

atio
om

n in
c

♦ Before attaching the seal (sealing film), remove dirt, grease


or

thi
and adhesive residue from bonding surfaces with silicone re‐
te

sd
a

mover -LLS MAX 007- .


iv

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
– Pull the seal (sealing film) -1- off the heater.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
– Clean bonding surfaces with silicone remover -LLS MAX 007- .
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

2.5.2 Rinsing (cleaning) refrigerant circuit with


R134a refrigerant

WARNING

If you suspect that chemical substances have been put in the


vehicle's refrigerant circuit in order to seal leaks, do not con‐
nect the A/C service station and do not vacuum-extract the
refrigerant.
Chemical substances for sealing off leaks cause deposits to
be formed in the refrigerant circuit; these deposits impair prop‐
er functioning of the air-conditioning system and lead to failure
of the air-conditioning system (and your A/C service station).
Draw the customer's attention to the fact that his air-condition‐
ing system contains substances that have not been approved
by VW. You cannot empty or repair this air-conditioning sys‐
tem.

20 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note

♦ VW rejects the use of chemical substances for sealing leaks


in the refrigerant circuit.
♦ Chemical substances used to seal leaks in the refrigerant cir‐
cuit usually react with the ambient air and the humidity this air
contains. They lead to deposits in the refrigerant circuit (and
your A/C service station), causing functional impairments at
the valves and other components with which they come into
contact. These deposits cannot be completely removed from
the components (not even by rinsing).
♦ From the outside, you cannot usually detect chemical sub‐
stances used to seal leaks in the refrigerant circuit. The nec‐
essary sticker which has to be glued on for marking purposes
has usually been removed. You should therefore be careful
when working on a vehicle whose past history you do not
know.

• In order to remove dirt (e.g. abraded matter from a defective


air-conditioning compressor) as well as old refrigerant oil as
cleanly as possible and with as little work as possible, rinse
the refrigerant circuit with R134a refrigerant.

Note

How to rinse a refrigerant circuit is explained in the ⇒ Volkswagen


ServiceNet; Volkswagen TV; API Online; OR Volkswagen TV Net;
API / PKW under Modules, Body, and then the information broad‐
cast on 8.06.2005 “Rinsing the refrigerant circuit of a Golf Plus as
an example”.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
Note o
ir se tee
th or
au ac
ss
♦ If you do not have any of the two A/C service stations indicated
ce
le

above, you can also rinse the refrigerant circuit with the A/C
un

pt
an
d

service station you do have if the station is of the right type


itte

y li

(min. 7 kg of R134a refrigerant in the refrigerant bottle) by


rm

ab
pe

ility

making use of the rinsing device for refrigerant circuits -VAS


ot

6336/1- or rinsing device for refrigerant circuits -VAS 6337/1- .


wit
, is n

h re

However, the rinsing cycle must then be carried out manually.


hole

spec

♦ In the case of vehicles with threaded connections to the re‐


es, in part or in w

t to the co

frigerant circuit, adapter -V.A.G 1785/1- to adapter -V.A.G


1785/8- from the adapter case, car kit, VW/Audi -VAS 6338/1-
or adapter case, commercial vehicle kit -VAS 6338/50- , can
be used. In the case of vehicles with threaded connections to
rrectness of i

the air-conditioning compressor and collecting receptacle, two


l purpos

adapters -V.A.G 1785/8- are necessary.


♦ The adapter cases also contain a filling hose -VAS 6338/31-
nform
ercia

with 5/8 -18 UNF connections and a larger interior diameter in


order to bridge components (it is commercially available).
m

a
com

tion in

Preparatory work
r
te o

thi
s
iva

do

– Drain refrigerant circuit.


r
rp

cum
fo

– Remove air-conditioning compressor ⇒ Heating, air-condi‐


en
ng

t.
yi
tioning system .
Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
In the case of a vehicle with throttle and collecting receptacle. yri
p by
co Vo
by lksw
cted
– Remove throttle (vehicle-specific) and connect refrigerant
agen
Prote AG.
pipes to each other again ⇒ Heating, air-conditioning system .

2. General rules of cleanliness 21


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012AG. Volkswagen A
n G do
wage es n
Volks ot g
– Remove collecting receptacle
ed by (vehicle-specific) ⇒ Heating, ua
ra
air-conditioning system
horis and connect refrigerant pipes to each ntee
other (using the adapters
sa
ut
and the filling hose -VAS 6338/31- ) or
ac
from the adapter case, car kit, VW/Audi -VAS 6338/1- .
s

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

Note

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

The collecting receptacle could be rinsed but, because of its large

h re
interior volume, it takes up too much liquid refrigerant. If this re‐
hole

spec
frigerant is vacuum-extracted, the connecting receptacle freezes
es, in part or in w

up severely and the vacuum-extraction process takes much lon‐

t to the co
ger.

In the case of a vehicle with expansion valve and fluid container.

rrectness of i
– Remove fluid container ⇒ Heating, air-conditioning system
l purpos

(vehicle-specific, not necessary for all vehicles) and connect


the refrigerant pipes to each other (using the adapters and the

nform
ercia

filling hose -VAS 6338/31- ).


m

at
– Remove expansion valve ⇒ Heating, air-conditioning system
om

io
(vehicle-specific) and replace it with an adapter.

n
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

c
Note

um
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
If a suitable adapter for the expansion valve is not contained in Cop py
. rig
the adapter case, car kit, VW/Audi -VAS 6338/1- or adapter case,
ht ht
rig by
py
commercial vehicle kit -VAS 6338/50- , the removed expansion co Vo
by lksw
valve can also be drilled open (the old expansion valve is to be cted agen
Prote AG.
replaced with a new one).

Caution

♦ When boring it open, make sure that the sealing surfaces


on the expansion valve are not damaged.
♦ Otherwise, refrigerant will escape.

22 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note

♦ Before the expansion valve is drilled open open, some parts


have to be removed from it.
♦ There are different types of expansion valve. In the case of
type -A-, you have to remove parts -B-, -C- and -D-. Then,
detach the regulating element -E- from part -D-. Following this,
you drill open the expansion valve in area -F-, using a suitable
drill (diameter 6 mm).
♦ In the case of type -G-, you must remove parts -H-, -I- and
-K- and then drill open area -L-, using a suitable drill (diameter
6 mm).
♦ Remove drilling residue (filings) from the drilled-open expan‐
sion valve.
♦ Re-install parts -B-, -C- and -D- in the case of type -A- or part
-H- in the case of type -G-.

Note

In the case of vehicles with 2 evaporators, the circuit for the sec‐
ond evaporator is to be detached from the circuit of the first
evaporator and then rinsed in a separate step ⇒ Heating, air-
conditioning system .

Rinsing
– Check the amount of refrigerant in the refrigerant bottle; it must
contain at least 7 kg of R134a refrigerant.

Note
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
If necessary, eswitch
db
y V on the heater fitted to your refrigerant
gu
ara bottle
for 30 minutes
horis
before you start rinsing. This causes the
nte
epressure
in the refrigerant
sa
ut bottle to increase and speeds up filling oof r a the
c
rinsing circuit.
s
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

– Drain old-oil container of the A/C service station.


y li
erm

ab
ility

– Connect supply hose (high-pressure side) of the A/C service


ot p

wit

station with the help of an adapter and connect the low-pres‐


, is n

h re

sure line to the air-conditioning compressor (line with larger


hole

diameter).
spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co

– Connect return hose (low-pressure or intake side) of the A/C


service station to the output of the rinsing device for refrigerant
circuits.
rrectness of i

– Connect the input of the rinsing device for refrigerant circuits


to the high-pressure line leading to the air-conditioning com‐
l purpos

pressor with the help of an adapter (line with smaller diameter).


nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

2. General rules of cleanliness 23


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note

♦ The components must always be rinsed in the direction oppo‐


site to the refrigerant's direction of flow during operation of the
air-conditioning system.
♦ During rinsing, impurities from the refrigerantswcircuit
agen get into
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
the rinsing device for refrigerant circuitsband
y V into the A/C serv‐
olk not
gu
ice station and are retained in the filters
ise and driers fitted there.
d ara
nte
or
Depending on the impurity, theseuthcomponents are to be re‐ eo
ra
placed at shorter intervals in accordance
ss a with with the oper‐ c
ating instructions for the A/C service station or the rinsing

ce
e
nl

pt
device for refrigerant circuits.
du

an
itte

y li
♦ The filter in the rinsing device for refrigerant circuits is to be
erm

ab
ility
replaced after 2 rinsing cycles at the latest (rinsed vehicle),
ot p

depending on the type and degree of contamination of the

wit
, is n

h re
rinsed refrigerant circuit. If a severely contaminated refrigerant
hole

circuit is rinsed (the refrigerant oil from the refrigerant circuit is

spec
black or viscous or there are a lot of filings in the refrigerant
es, in part or in w

t to the co
circuit), the filter is to be replaced after the refrigerant circuit is
rinsed. In the case of a refrigerant circuit that is so contami‐
nated, it is also useful to rinse the refrigerant circuit again after

rrectness of i
the filter has been changed.
l purpos

♦ Depending on the type of contamination, dirt (old refrigerant


oil and abraded matter from the air-conditioning compressor)
is deposited on the sight glass(es) of the rinsing device for

nf
ercia

refrigerant circuits. Clean the sight glass(es) after rinsing and

orm
then rinse the refrigerant circuit again with another rinsing run
m

atio
m

to be on the safe side.


o

n in
or c

thi
♦ Liquid refrigerant cannot be pumped through the expansion
te

sd
a

valve, the throttle and the dessicant bag of certain liquid con‐
iv

o
r
rp

tainers at the necessary speed. These components must cu


o

m
f

en

therefore be removed and replaced with adapters ⇒ Heating,


ng

t.
yi Co
air-conditioning system . t. Cop py
rig
gh ht
♦ Adapter for connecting the A/C service station and for bridging pyri by
Vo
co
certain components in the refrigerant circuit.
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

– Switch A/C service station on and rinse refrigerant circuit (du‐


ration approx. 1 to 1.5 hours for a rinsing cycle with 3 rinsing
runs).

24 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note

♦ Rinsing of a refrigerant circuit is to be carried out in accordance


with the operating instructions for the A/C service station.
♦ The container for old oil holds only approx. 125 cm3 of refrig‐
erant oil, depending on the type of A/C service station. If a
system has to be rinsed with a larger amount of refrigerant oil,
it may be necessary to drain the old-oil container after the first
rinsing run of a rinsing cycle.
♦ Keep an eye on the refrigerant that flows back out of the re‐
frigerant circuit. The refrigerant circuit has been cleaned only
a gen AG
. Volkswagen AG
does
ksw
if the refrigerant is clear and completely colourlessbywhen
Vol it not
gu
flows through the sight glass(es) of the rinsingridevice
sed for re‐ ara
nte
frigerant circuits and into the A/C service station.
ut
ho eo
r
sa ac
♦ During rinsing, the entire refrigerant oil is swashed out of the

ce
le

refrigerant circuit (except for a very small residue which can


un

pt
an
d

be ignored).
itte

y li
erm

ab
♦ If the circuit is very dirty, it may be necessary to carry out two

ility
ot p

rinsing cycles (2 rinsing cycles, each cycle consisting of 3

wit
is n

rinsing runs). Before the second rinsing cycle, the filter of the

h re
ole,

rinsing device must be replaced with a new one.

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
Sequence of steps in a rinsing run (these steps are carried out
automatically in accordance with the program of the A/C service
station)

rrectne
♦ After the station is switched on, the rinsing circuit (refrigerant
circuit with connecting hoses and the rinsing device for refrig‐

ss
erant circuits) is first evacuated, whereby the refrigerant circuit

o
cial p

f
is checked for leaks at the same time. It may be necessary to

inform
start the next steps manually, depending on the type of A/C
mer

service station.

atio
om

n
c

♦ A predetermined amount of refrigerant (e.g. 4 kg) is pumped

i
or

n thi
into the evacuated rinsing circuit via the high-pressure side of
te

sd
va

the A/C service station (opposite to the direction of flow that is


i

o
pr

cum
normal during operation of the air-conditioning system) and
r
fo

en
ng

therefore at the low-pressure end of the vehicle's refrigerant


t.
yi Co
op
circuit. Depending on the type of A/C service station, enough C py
ht. rig
refrigerant is pumped in until the rinsing circuit has been com‐ rig ht
py by
pletely filled with liquid refrigerant. This is indicated by the fact co Vo
by lksw
that refrigerant stops flowing into the circuit for a certain
cted agen
Prote AG.
amount of time, for example.
♦ After the specified amount of refrigerant has been pumped in,
the heater of the rinsing device for refrigerant circuits is switch‐
ed on, for example, depending on the type of A/C service
station and rinsing device for refrigerant circuits (only if the
refrigerant is extracted in gaseous form from the rinsing device
for refrigerant circuits).
♦ Once the refrigerant has been extracted, the heater (if there is
one) of the rinsing device for refrigerant circuits is switched off
(it is possible that the refrigerant circuit will then be briefly
evacuated again, depending on the type of equipment). After
evacuation, the refrigerant oil extracted from the refrigerant
circuit is separated by the A/C service station.
♦ The sequential procedure of filling, extracting (and evacuating)
refrigerant is repeated twice (i.e. three times altogether).
♦ After the third extraction, the rinsing circuit is evacuated, de‐
pending on the type of A/C service station.

2. General rules of cleanliness 25


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– After a rinsing cycle, check the sight glass(es) of the rinsing


device for refrigerant circuits and, if they are dirty, clean them
in accordance with the operating instructions for the rinsing
device for refrigerant circuits or the A/C service station. Carry
out a rinsing cycle again to be on the safe side. One rinsing
run is sufficient (approx. 30 min).
– Check the pressure in the refrigerant circuit, making sure that
there is no excess pressure in the refrigerant circuit (briefly
evacuate the refrigerant circuit again, if necessary).
– Remove the connections to the A/C service station from the
vehicle's refrigerant circuit. Make sure that there is no excess
pressure in the refrigerant circuit.
– Replace the following components (depending on vehicle):
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
♦ Throttle and collecting receptacle Volksw not
gu
by ara
d
♦ Expansion valve and liquid container or dessicant cartridge rise
in nte
ho eo
the liquid container aut ra
c
ss
– ⇒ Heating, air-conditioning system and ⇒ Parts catalogue .

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

– Replace the air-conditioning compressor if the problem ne‐

y li
erm

ab
cessitates such replacement ⇒ Heating, air-conditioning sys‐

ility
ot p

tem and ⇒ Parts catalogue or drain the remaining refrigerant

wit
oil from the removed air-conditioning compressor (replace
, is n

h re
components of refrigerant circuit) and refill the circuit with the
hole

spec
specified amount of fresh refrigerant oil ⇒ Vehicle-specific re‐
es, in part or in w

pair manual .

t to the co
Note

rrectness of i
l purpos

♦ In the "genuine (i.e. VW)" air-conditioning compressor, there


is a certain predetermined amount of refrigerant oil. In the case
of vehicles with 2 evaporators, it is possible that you will have

nf
ercia

to add a certain amount of additional refrigerant oil to the oil

orm
already in the circuit ⇒ Vehicle-specific repair manual
m

atio
om

n in
♦ If the air-conditioning compressor does not need to be re‐
or c

placed, you must fill the air-conditioning compressor with ad‐

thi
te

sd
a

ditional refrigerant oil in accordance with the amount prescri‐


iv

o
r
rp

cu
bed (tip out refrigerant oil and fill the air-conditioning
o

m
f

compressor or the refrigerant circuit with the prescribed


en
ng

t.
yi
amount) (replace components of the refrigerant circuit) and
Co
Cop py
the ⇒ vehicle-specific repair manual .
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted
– Re-assemble the refrigerant circuit completely ⇒ Heating, air-
agen
Prote AG.
conditioning system .
– Evacuate and fill the refrigerant circuit as prescribed.
– Start up the air-conditioning system as prescribed ⇒ Heating,
air-conditioning system .

26 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

2.5.3 Cleaning plug mantle on supplementary


heater
1 - Plug mantle for B1LC; B3LP and B3LC heaters
- (fibre metal)
2 - Plug mantle for D1LC; D3LP and D3LC heaters
- (screen)
– Pull plug mantle out of plug socket by the lug -arrow A- with
the help of pliers.
– Clean coked plug mantle with brass wire brush (commercially
available) and, if necessary, replace.
– Blow out hole for plug ventilation -arrow B- with compressed
air.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
ir se tee
tho
or
2.5.4 Cleaning the evaporator with the suction au ac
ss
feed spray gun -V.A.G 1538- and spray‐

ce
le
un

pt
an
d

ing lance
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
The evaporator is directly sprayed with “Contra Sept” with the help
ot

wit
of a spraying lance (approx. 10 bar).
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

Note

t to the co
“Contra Sept” neutralises dirt in the form of microbes and bacteria
directly on the evaporator.

rrectness of i
l purpos

In order to enable access to the evaporator, preparatory work and


different spraying lances are necessary, e.g. V.A.G 1538/5; V.A.G
1538/6 or V.A.G 1538/7.

nform
ercia

The cleaning solution for D 600 100 A2 evaporators comes with


m

a
com

ti
a set of vehicle-specific user instructions.

on in
r
te o

thi
Current devices and spraying lances can be found in ⇒ Service‐ s
iva

Net Function “Search”.


do
r
rp

cum
fo

2.5.5 Cleaning work on heat exchanger


en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
yri
WARNING
p by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
Danger of freezing injuries.
If refrigerant circuit has not been evacuated, refrigerant can
escape.
Extract refrigerant before opening refrigerant circuit.

Note

Before installing the heat exchanger, check the foam base -1- and
the all-round seal of the roof air-conditioning system -2- for dam‐
age and looseness. If necessary, replace them.

2. General rules of cleanliness 27


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Before installing the heat exchanger, clean the seal's contact


surface -3- on the roof of the vehicle.

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
2.6 Rules of cleanliness during work with in‐
erm

ab
ility
ot p

formation material “Maintenance Man‐


wit
is n

ual - Body”
h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

Special tools and workshop equipment required


t to the co
♦ Universal cloth -VAS 6385-
♦ Hot-air blower -V.A.G 1416-
rrectne

♦ Removal wedge -3409-


ss

♦ Non-fibrous lint-free cloths


o
cial p

f in

Cleaning and removing excess adhesive on the retaining plate for


form
mer

the interior mirror with rain sensor ⇒ page 28


atio
om

Cleaning in the event of dirt caused by adhesive sealing material


n
c

i
or

⇒ page 29
thi
te

sd
va

Cleaning work on windscreen ⇒ page 29


i

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

Cleaning work on the retaining plate for the interior mirror with rain
t.
yi Co
sensor ⇒ page 29 Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
yri
Cleaning work on the side window ⇒ page 30 p by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Cleaning work on door outer seal ⇒ page 30 Prote AG.

Cleaning work if a mirror base has fallen off or if new mirror base
is to be fitted ⇒ page 30
Cleaning work when a hard top is to be fitted ⇒ page 30
Cleaning work before renewal of emblems etc. ⇒ page 31
Cleaning work before replacement of protective film (transparent)
⇒ page 31
Cleaning water drainage hoses (Polo Classic) ⇒ page 32
Cleaning water drainage hoses (Polo Variant) ⇒ page 33
Cleaning water drainage hoses (Transporter) ⇒ page 33

2.6.1 Cleaning and removing excess adhe‐


sive on the retaining plate for the interior
mirror with rain sensor
– 0,5 ... 1 hour after attaching mirror base, carefully remove ad‐
hesive tap.

28 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Scrape off the still-soft adhesive residue, using a suitable


spatula.
– Completely remove any remaining adhesive residue with a
primer applicator or cloth soaked in cleaning solution.

2.6.2 Cleaning in the event of dirt caused by


adhesive sealing material
– Use of the adhesive remover -D 002 000 10- as a cleaning
agent is recommended. When this work is being done, the
safety relations must be observed.

WARNING

When the vehicle interior is being cleaned, makewasure not


gen AG
. Voto
lkswagen AG
does
press the window that has just been fitted towards
yV
olks
the outside. not
gu b ara
ed nte
oris e
th or
au ac
– First, clean the painted surface a dry cloth. Re‐ roughly
ss with
move residual dirt, using the adhesive remover -D 002 000

ce
le
un

pt
10- .

an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
– Allow adhesive sealing material of plastic trim to harden (ap‐

ility
ot p

prox. 1 hour) and then pull it off.

wit
is n

h re
– Clean surface of outer panel with adhesive remover -D 002
ole,

000 10- immediately before fitting attachments and then care‐

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

fully remover dirt, grease, wax and other impurities with plastic

t to the co
cleaner -D 195 850 A1- .
– Clean the painted surface roughly with a dry cloth.

rrectne
– Remove residual dirt, using adhesive remover -D 002 000 10- .

2.6.3 Cleaning work on windscreen

ss o
cial p

f in
– Clean the viewing window -arrow- of the windscreen -1- from

form
mer

the inside, using the cleaning solution -009 401 04- .

atio
m

– Clean a 20 mm wide strip all round the edge of the window


o

n
c

i
or

n
with the cleaning solution -D 009 401 04- .
thi
te

sd
va

– Then, dry the window edge with a lint-free cloth.


i

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi
WARNING
Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
yri by
The ceramic coating on the glass is not a primer. The glass cop Vo
by lksw
must be primed before the adhesive sealing material is applied.
cted agen
Prote AG.
Only use glass/paint primer D 009 200 02!

2.6.4 Cleaning work on the retaining plate for


the interior mirror with rain sensor
– All adhesive and primer residue must be removed down as far
as the initial ceramic coating.
– Cleaning bonding surface with cleaning solution D 009 401 04.

Note

Allow for a drying time of at least 10 minutes.

2. General rules of cleanliness 29


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

2.6.5 Cleaning work on the side window


– Clean a 20 mm wide strip all round the edge of the side window
in the sliding door -1- with the cleaning solution -D 009 401
04- .
– Then, dry the window edge with a lint-free cloth. agen
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
aut ra
ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

2.6.6 Cleaning work on door outer seal

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
– Clean the bonding surface all round with the adhesive remover
-D 002 000 10- and then dry the bonding surface with a cloth.

rrectness of i
Note
l purpos

The entire bonding surface must be free of dust and grease.

nf
ercia

orm
2.6.7 Cleaning work if a mirror base has fallen
m

atio
om

off or if new mirror base is to be fitted

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
a

– Remove adhesive residue mechanically (this only applies if


iv

o
r
rp

cu
mirror base has fallen off).
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi
– Wet-grind the bonding surface with very fine emery paper (800
Co
op py
to 1200 grain) until the bonding surface is covered with a fine t. C rig
gh ht
layer of water. yri
p by
o Vo
by c lksw
cted
– Then, clean bonding surface with cleaning solution D 009 401
agen
Prote AG.
04.

2.6.8 Cleaning work when a hard top is to be


fitted
– Remove residual adhesive sealing material at points where
hard top and body are connected to each other.
– Clean the points where the hard top and body are connected
to each other, using silicone remover -LSE 020 000 A3- .

30 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Apply PUR adhesive sealing material -AKD 476 KD5- in white


to all the points of connection -arrow-.

2.6.9 Cleaning work before renewal of em‐


blems etc.
– Before removing an emblem etc., heat it with the hot-air blower
-V.A.G 1416- .
– Lever off an emblem etc. from the rear lid with the removal
wedge -3409- , for example.
– Remove any remaining adhesive residue, using the adhesive
strip remover -VAS 6349- .
– Thoroughly clean the bonding surface directly before bonding,
using adhesive remover -D 002 000 10- .

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
Note Volksw not
gu
by ara
d
rise nte
♦ Bonding surfaces must
utho be free of dust, grease, dirt and other eo
ra
media and mustssbe
a dry. c
ce
le

♦ First, pull protective film off the preliminary seal directly before
un

pt
an
d

fitting.
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility

2.6.10 Cleaning work before replacement of


ot

wit
, is n

h re

protective film (transparent)


hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co

Note
rrectness of i

♦ The transparent protective film must be stuck on with water


and soap.
l purpos

♦ The exact mixing ratio is 1 ml of liquid soap to 1 litre of water.


The mixture must be well stirred.
nform
ercia

♦ Do not pull backing off the bonding surface until immediately


m

before fitting. Working temperature approx. 20 °C.


com

tion in
r
te o

thi

– Heat protective film with a hot-air blower -V.A.G 1416- and pull
s
iva

do

protective film off surface of outer panel.


r
rp

cum
fo

en

– Clean outer panel with petroleum ether, then treat it with sili‐
ng

t.
yi Co
cone remover and dry with a cloth. t. Cop py
rig
gh ht
• Bonding surfaces must be free of dust and grease. pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

2. General rules of cleanliness 31


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Spray a thin film of soapy water onto the surface of the outer
panel, using a spray bottle.
– Pull backing of the bonding surface off the protective film.
– Apply and align protective film.
– Push out the water under the film, using a plastic wiping blade
with a paper tissue wrapped around it.

Note

The paper tissue is needed to ensure that the hard edge of the
plastic wiping blade does not scratch the film.

2.6.11 Cleaning water drainage hoses (Polo Classic)

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
aut ra
ss c
ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

a
com

tion in
r
te o

thi

The water drainage hoses at the front -1- are routed through or
s
iva

do

on the A-pillars and end in the plenum chamber. Cleaning is car‐


r
rp

cum

ried out from the sliding/tilting roof aperture.


fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
The water drainage hoses at the rear -2- are routed through the Cop py
t. rig
D-pillars and end behind the bumper cover. Cleaning is carried yri
gh by
ht
out from the lower end of the hoses. The bumper or the luggage op Vo
by c lksw
compartment trim must be removed for this. cted agen
Prote AG.

32 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note

An auxiliary tool - a probe which is approx. 2,300 mm long and


made of speedometer drive shaft cores - is recommended for
cleaning.

2.6.12 Cleaning water drainage hoses


The water drainage hoses at the front are routed through or along
the A-pillars and end in the plenum chamber. Cleaning is carried
out from the sliding/tilting roof aperture.
The water drainage hoses at the rear are routed through the D-
pillars and end in the water drainage valves behind the bumper
cover. Cleaning is carried out from the lower end of the hoses.
The bumper or the luggage compartment trim must be removed
for this.

Note

An auxiliary tool - a probe which is approx. 2,300 mm long and


made of speedometer drive shaft cores - is recommended for
cleaning.

2.6.13 Cleaning water drainage hoses (Trans‐


porter)
The water drainage hoses at the front are routed on the A-pillars
and end at the partition wall in the engine compartment. Cleaning
is carried out from the sliding/tilting roof aperture.

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
ss c
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

2. General rules of cleanliness 33


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

The water drainage hoses at the rear are routed through the D-
pillars and end in the rear wheel housings. Cleaning is carried out
from the wheel housing and, to do this, the wheel housing liner
must be removed.

34 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
aut ra
ss c ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

at
om

io

Note
n
c

in t
or

his
ate

A probe which is approx. 2,300 mm long and made of speedom‐


do
priv

eter drive shaft cores is recommended for cleaning.


um
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
2.7 Rules of cleanliness during work with in‐
C py
t. rig
gh ht
yri
formation material “Maintenance Man‐
p by
o Vo
by c lksw
cted agen
ual - Body”
Prote AG.

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Universal cloth -VAS 6385-
♦ Non-fibrous lint-free cloths
♦ Commercially available screw tap
♦ Commercially available protective goggles

2. General rules of cleanliness 35


AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
o lksw not
y V gu
Amarokris2011
ed b
➤ ara
nte
Maintenance
autho
- Edition 10.2012 eo
ra
ss c

ce
Cleaning ATF lines and ATF cooler ⇒ page 36 e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

Removing locking agent from threaded holes ⇒ page 36

y li
erm

ab
ility
Cleaning work on the clutch ⇒ page 37
ot p

wit
, is n

Cleaning work on bolts and nuts ⇒ page 37

h re
hole

spec
2.7.1 Cleaning ATF lines and ATF cooler
es, in part or in w

t to the co
If the ATF is contaminated, blow out the engine oil cooler and ATF
lines with compressed air (max. 10 bar) before installing the gear‐
box or installing a replacement gearbox.

rrectness of i
l purpos

WARNING

nf
ercia

Wear protective goggles.

orm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

– Unscrew and remove the nuts of the ATF lines and pull ATF

thi
e

lines off the gearbox.


t

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

– Remove the ATF lines -1- off the ATF cooler. When doing this,
counterhold on the connecting piece -2-.
– Attach a hose to the ATF line and secure with a hose clip.
Place the other end of the hose in a suitable container.
– Blow out ATF line with compressed air.
– Attach hose to other ATF line and repeat the procedure.

Note

♦ Always replace the O-rings of the ATF lines.


♦ Wet the O-rings with ATF.

2.7.2 Removing locking agent from threaded


holes
– Remove locking agent from all threaded holes.

Note

Cleaning can be carried out with a screw tap.

36 2. General rules of cleanliness


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

2.7.3 Cleaning work on the clutch

Note

Clean splines of drive shaft and, if the clutch plate has been used,
clean the splines of the hub. Remove corrosion and apply a very
thin layer of lubricating grease for male splines of clutch plates -
G 000 100- to the splines. Then, move the clutch plate back and
forth on the drive shaft until the hub moves easily on the shaft.
Remove excess grease.

– In order to reduce the smell of a burned clutch, the clutch


housing as well as the stopping face of the flywheel must be
thoroughly cleaned with a cloth.

2.7.4 Cleaning work on bolts and nuts

Note

Residual locking agent must be removed from all threaded holes


into which self-locking bolts are screwed; this is done with a screw
tap. Otherwise, there is a danger that the bolts will shear off when
refitted.

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
ss c
ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
rrectness o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

2. General rules of cleanliness 37


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

3 Service work
This chapter provides information on the following subjects:
♦ Information reference flexible or fixed service ⇒ page 38
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
♦ Service tables ⇒ page 40 olksw not
byV gu
ara
ed
♦ Scopes of service ⇒ page 50 horis nte
eo
aut ra
3.1 Information reference flexible or fixed ss c

ce
le
service

un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
Service identification ⇒ page 38

ility
ot p
Flexible service ⇒ page 38

wit
is n

h re
ole,

Fixed service ⇒ page 39

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

Service interval display ⇒ page 39

t to the co
3.1.1 Service identification

rrectne
– Referring to vehicle data sticker ⇒ page 59 , check if vehicle
is equipped with following PR numbers:

ss
The PR number is decisive for the service intervals

o
cial p

f
⇒ page 40 .

inform
mer

Model year PR number Service

atio
om

n
c

► 2012 QG1 Flexible service

i
or

n thi
e

► 2012 QG0, QG2 Fixed service


t

sd
iva

o
pr

c
2013 ► QI6 Flexible service

um
r
fo

en
ng

t.
2013 ► QI8 Flexible service
yi Co
Cop py
2013 ► QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4, QI5, QI7 Fixed service
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

3.1.2 Flexible service


The flexible service enables long service intervals, depending on
individual driving style and the conditions under which the vehicle
is used.

Note

For the flexible service, special LongLife engine oil is required


⇒ page 42 .

Vehicles with PR number “QG1” or “QI6/QI8” are set up for flexible


service before they leave the factory. This means that these ve‐
hicles have a flexible service interval display ⇒ page 39 and are
fitted with the following components:
♦ Flexible service interval display in dash panel insert
♦ Engine oil level sensor
♦ Brake pad wear indicator (if fitted)
For vehicles with flexible service the service interval is determined
by the control unit and is indicated on service interval display
(SID) ⇒ page 39 .
Therefore the service intervals are flexible.

38 3. Service work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

3.1.3 Fixed service


For vehicles with a fixed service, fixed services are calculated.
This means that the indicated mileage or time intervals have al‐
ready been determined and specified by Volkswagen Commer‐
cial Vehicles. For normal operating conditions achieving these
service intervals is technically assured.
Therefore the service intervals are fixed.
For vehicles
♦ Which have not been delivered with extended servicing inter‐
vals (ESI) (PR numbers “QG0”, “QG2”, “QI1”, “QI2”, “QI3”,
“QI4”, “QI5”, “QI7”.
♦ When the extended servicing interval (ESI) was stopped.
♦ When no LongLife engine oil was used.
The fixed service applies.
These non-flexible service intervals apply to all types of service
including an engine oil change.
Vehicles with PR number “QG0”.
The vehicles are “not” factory-fitted with components for flexible
service. Fixed service intervals apply for maintenance.
Vehicles with PR number “QG2”
The PR number is valid only to ►2012.
For these vehicles the flexible service is not factory-activated.
Therefore, these vehicles have a fixed service interval display
⇒ page 39 and for maintenance the fixed service intervals (rigid
service intervals) apply. These vehicles are fitted with the follow‐
ing components:
♦ Fixed service interval display in dash panel insert
♦ Engine oil level sensor
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
wage
♦ Brake pad wear indicator (ifVofitted)
lks es n
ot g
by ua
d ran
ir se
3.1.4 Service interval display
utho tee
or
a ac
ss
Introduction of extended servicing intervals (ESI) ⇒ page 39
ce
e
nl

pt
du

Flexible service interval display (only vehicles with a flexible serv‐


an
itte

y li

ice) ⇒ page 39
erm

ab
ility
ot p

Fixed service interval display (only vehicles with a fixed service)


wit
, is n

⇒ page 40
h re
hole

spec

Service interval display: Resetting ⇒ page 141


es, in part or in w

t to the co

Service interval display: Adapting ⇒ page 143


rrectness of i

Introduction of extended servicing intervals (ESI)


l purpos

Ask your importer if the extended servicing interval (ESI) is avail‐


able for your country.
nform
ercia

Flexible service interval display (only vehicles with a flexible serv‐


m

ice)
at
om

ion
c

Calculation of service intervals:


in t
or

his
ate

♦ The service intervals on vehicles with a flexible service is cal‐


do
priv

culated. Input values such as, distance travelled, fuel con‐


um
for

en
g

sumption, oil temperature and loading on diesel particulate


n

t.
yi Co
filter are evaluated by the control unit. t. Cop py
rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by

39
cted agen
Prote AG.
3. Service work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

♦ The result of the evaluation is a measure of the deterioration


of the oil due to thermal load.
♦ Oil deterioration is the decisive factor in determining the dis‐
tance that can still be driven before the next service.

Note

For vehicles with a flexible service but which are serviced ac‐
cording to fixed service intervals, the service interval display must
be recoded to “non-flexible” ⇒ page 143 .

Fixed service interval display (only vehicles with a fixed service)


Calculation of service intervals:
♦ The service interval for vehicles with a fixed service is calcu‐
lated in fixed service intervals. This means that the mileage or
time values have been previously determined and specified by
Volkswagen Commercial Vehicles.
♦ For normal operating conditions achieving these service in‐
tervals is technically assured.

3.2 Service tables


The following chapter contains the well-known service tables with
the service specifications of the Volkswagen Commercial Vehi‐
cles brand. Since, in the past, individual service specifications
were set up in various markets, mostly through severe operating
conditions, these are listed in service tables with specific devia‐
tions. en AG. V
olkswagen AG
wag does
Service tables ⇒ page 40 olks not
byV gu
ara
ed nte
ris
Service tables with market-specific
tho deviations ⇒ page 43 eo
au ra
c
ss
ce
e
nl

pt

Note
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab

♦ For combined kilometre and time display applies: whichever


ility
ot p

occurs first.
wit
, is n

h re

♦ Depending on conditions under which the vehicle is used and


hole

spec

vehicle equipment, extra service work must be performed in


es, in part or in w

addition to the interval service, inspection service or interval


t to the co

service inspection.
♦ It is also possible, to perform additional work outside the serv‐
rrectness of i

ice intervals with regard to the entries in the service schedule


(or sticker: your next service).
l purpos

3.2.1 Service tables


nform
ercia

♦ Service interval ⇒ page 41


m

at
om

ion

♦ VW engine oil standards ⇒ page 42


c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

40 3. Service work
Amarok 2011 ➤
agen
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
olksw not
yV gu
Service intervalsrised b ara
nte
ho eo
aut ra
s
s Caution c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

Only applies to diesel engines:

y li
erm

ab
• Some countries have an elevated sulphur content in diesel

ility
ot p

fuel.

wit
, is n

h re
hole

♦ The high sulphur content leads to excessive wear of cyl‐

spec
inders and it considerably reduces the cleanliness of pis‐
es, in part or in w

tons.

t to the co
♦ Therefore, in those countries with an elevated sulphur
content in diesel fuel, change the engine oil every 5,000

rrectness of i
km.
l purpos

nf
ercia

o
Note

rm
m

atio
om

n in
However, other intervals apply for other countries. Your importer
or c

will inform you about this.

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
Amarok 2010 ►
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
ht. Cop
Service interval 2010 ►2012 py
rig
From to Engine/ Service: Indication on SID
rig ht
py by
o Vo
Engine code/ Intervals (with oil change)
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote
PR No./Remarks
AG.

2010 ▶ Diesel engines with high Oil change service (fixed): YES
2012 sulphur content in diesel every 10,000 km or 1 year
fuel
QG0/QG2 or QG1 vehicles Oil change service (fixed): YES
coded to fixed intervals every 15,000 km or 1 year (petrol en‐
gine)
Oil change service (fixed): YES
every 20,000 km or 1 year (diesel en‐
gine)
Interval service (fixed): YES
max. 30,000 km or 2 years (petrol en‐
gine)
Interval service (fixed): YES
max. 40,000 km or 2 years (diesel en‐
gine)
QG1 vehicles Interval service (flexible): YES
max. 30,000 km or 2 years (petrol en‐
gine)
Interval service (flexible): YES
max. 40,000 km or 2 years (diesel en‐
gine)
All vehicles First inspection service after NO
3 years, then every 2 years

3. Service work 41
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Amarok 2013►
Service intervals 2013►
From - to PR No. Service: Indication on SID
Intervals (with oil change)
2013► QI1 Oil change service (fixed): YES
every 5,000 km or 1 year
QI2 Oil change service (fixed): YES
every 7,500 km or 1 year
QI3 Oil change service (fixed): YES
every 10,000 km or 1 year
QI4 Oil change service (fixed): YES
every 15,000 km or 1 year
QI5 Oil change service (fixed): YES
every 20,000 km or 1 year
QI7 Oil change service (fixed): YES
every 10,000 mi or 1 year
QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4, QI5, QI7 Interval service (fixed): YES
every 30,000 km or 2 years (petrol
engine)
QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4, QI5, QI7 Interval service (fixed): YES
every 40,000 km or 2 years (diesel
engine)
QI6 Interval service (flexible): YES
every 30,000 km or 2 years (petrol
engine)
QI8 AG. Volkswagen AG d
Interval
agen service (flexible):oes YES
ksw
V every 40,000 km or 2 yearsot (diesel
ol n
by gu
rise
d engine) ara
nte
ho eo
QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4,
s aut
QI5, First inspection service after ra
c
NO
QI6, QI7, QI8 s 3 years, then every 2 years
ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit

Note
is n

h re
ole,

spec

For combined kilometre and time display applies: whichever oc‐


urposes, in part or in wh

curs first.
t to the co

VW ENGINE OIL STANDARDS


rrectne

Caution
ss o
cial p

Only engine oils approved by VW may be used, up-to-date in‐


inform

formation ⇒ ServiceNet, Technical information, Inspection and


mer

maintenance, Approved oils , or ask your importer.


atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
a

Amarok
iv

o
pr

cum
r

VW ENGINE OIL STANDARDS


fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
With flexible service t. Cop
With fixed service
py
rig
gh
PETROL ENGINE
ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
4-cylinder 504 00 cted 4-cylinder 504 001)
agen
Prote AG.
alternative 503 00 502 00 2)
DIESEL ENGINES

42 3. Service work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Amarok
VW ENGINE OIL STANDARDS
4-cylinder 507 00 1) 4-cylinder 507 00 1)
(with Bosch EDC 17 505 01 2) (with Bosch EDC 17 505 012)
TDI common rail with die‐ TDI common rail with die‐
sel particulate filter) sel particulate filter)
4-cylinder 507 00 1) 4-cylinder 507 00 1)
(with Bosch EDC 17 505 012) (with Bosch EDC 17 505 012)
TDI common rail without TDI common rail without
diesel particulate filter) diesel particulate filter)

1) Only for markets where diesel complies with EN 590.


2) Only for markets with elevated sulphur content in diesel fuel.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
yV gu
3.2.2 Service tables with market-specific de‐
orised b ara
nte
viations h eo
aut ra
ss c

ce
le

The following chapter contains the service tables for Volkswagen


un

pt
commercial vehicles for markets with individual maintenance re‐

an
d
itte

y li
quirements that differ from the German market due to the more
erm

ab
difficult vehicle operating conditions in those markets.

ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

Caution

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
Only applies to diesel engines!
♦ In some regions, the sulphur content is relatively high.
rrectne

♦ The high sulphur content leads to excessive wear of cyl‐


inders and it considerably reduces the cleanliness of pis‐
tons.
ss o
cial p

♦ Therefore, in those countries with an elevated sulphur


inform

content in diesel fuel, change the engine oil every 5,000


mer

km.
atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

Note
um
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
♦ Depending on the conditions of use and the vehicle's equip‐ C py
ht. rig
ment, extra service work must be performed in addition to the rig ht
py by
inspection service or oil change service.
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
♦ To ensure that every service is carried out at the right time and
that no service is forgotten, a service sticker on the door pillar
or the service interval indicator on the display of the dash panel
insert serves as a reminder.
♦ For combined kilometre and time display applies: whichever
occurs first.

3. Service work 43
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Amarok 2010 ►
Service interval 2010 ►2012
From to Engine/ Service: Indication on SID
Engine code/ Intervals (with oil change)
PR No./Remarks
2010 ▶ Diesel engines with high Oil change service depending on sul‐ YES
2012 sulphur content in diesel phur content in fuel ⇒ page 45
fuel
QG0/QG2 or QG1 vehicles Oil change service (fixed): YES
coded to fixed intervals, ex‐ every 15,000 km or 1 year (petrol en‐
port gine)
Interval service (fixed): YES
max. 30,000 km or 2 years (petrol en‐
gine)
Interval service (fixed): YES
max. 40,000 km or 2 years (diesel en‐
gine)
QG1 vehicles, export Interval service (flexible): YES
max. 30,000 km or 2 years (petrol en‐
gine)
Interval service (flexible): YES
max. 40,000 km or 2 years (diesel en‐
gine)
All vehicles First inspection service after NO
3 years, then every 2 years
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
ir se tee
tho
u or
a ac
ss
ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
rrectness o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

44 3. Service work
Amarok 2011 ➤
n AG. VolkswMaintenance
agen AG - Edition 10.2012
lkswage does
not
Vo gu
by ara
Amarok
ris
ed 2013► nte
tho eo
Service
au intervals 2013► ra
c
ss
From - to PR No. Service: Indicated on

ce
e
nl

pt
Intervals service interval display

du

an
itte
(includes oil change)

y li
erm

ab
ility
2013► QI1 Oil change service (fixed): YES

ot p

wit
every 5,000 km or 1 year

, is n

h re
QI2 Oil change service (fixed): YES

hole

spec
every 7,500 km or 1 year
es, in part or in w

t to the co
QI3 Oil change service (fixed): YES
every 10,000 km or 1 year
QI4 Oil change service (fixed): YES

rrectness of i
every 15,000 km or 1 year
l purpos

QI5 Oil change service (fixed): YES


every 20,000 km or 1 year

nform
ercia

QI7 Oil change service (fixed): YES


every 10,000 mi or 1 year
m

at
om

io
QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4, QI5, QI7 Interval service (fixed): YES

n
c

in t
r

every 30,000 km or 2 years (petrol


o

his
e

engine)
at

do
priv

c
QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4, QI5, QI7 Interval service (fixed): YES

um
for

every 40,000 km or 2 years (diesel

en
ng

t.
yi Co
engine) t. Cop py
rig
gh
QI6 Interval service (flexible): YES
ht
pyri by
Vo
every 30,000 km or 2 years (petrol
co lksw
by
cted agen
engine) Prote AG.

QI8 Interval service (flexible): YES


every 40,000 km or 2 years (diesel
engine)
QI1, QI2, QI3, QI4, QI5, First inspection service after NO
QI6, QI7, QI8 3 years, then every 2 years

Note

For combined kilometre and time display applies: whichever oc‐


curs first.

Oil change intervals depending on sulphur content in fuel


Amarok ► 2012
Oil change intervals depending on sulphur content in fuel
Fuel quality (EN590) ◀ 500 ppm 500-2,000 ppm 2,000-4,000 ppm ► 4,000 ppm
Change interval ESI 20 tkm/1 year 10 tkm/1 year 7.5 tkm/1 year 5 tkm/1 year
Abu Dhabi X
Afghanistan X
Egypt X
Albania X
Algeria X
Angola X
Equatorial Guinea X
Armenia X
Azerbaijan X
Ethiopia X

3. Service work 45
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Amarok ► 2012
Oil change intervals depending on sulphur content in fuel
Fuel quality (EN590) ◀ 500 ppm 500-2,000 ppm 2,000-4,000 ppm ► 4,000 ppm
Change interval ESI 20 tkm/1 year 10 tkm/1 year 7.5 tkm/1 year 5 tkm/1 year
Australia X
Bahamas X
Bahrain X
Bangladesh X
Belgium X
Belize X
AG. Volkswagen AG d
Benin agen oes X
o lksw not
V gu
by
Bermuda ised ara
nte X
or eo
Bhutan aut
h
X ra
ss c
Bolivia X

ce
le
un

pt
Bosnia-Herzegovina X

an
d
itte

y li
erm

Botswana X

ab
ility
ot p

British Overseas Territo‐ X

wit
is n

ries

h re
ole,

spec
Brunei X
urposes, in part or in wh

Bulgaria X

t to the co
Burkina Faso X
Burundi rrectne
X
Chile X
s

China X
s o
cial p

Costa Rica X
inform
mer

Denmark X
atio
m

Dem. Rep. Congo X


o

n
c

i
or

Djibouti X
thi
te

sd
va

Dominican Republic X
i

o
pr

cum
r
fo

Dubai X
en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
Ecuador X
C py
t. rig
gh ht
yri
El Salvador X
p by
o Vo
by c lksw
cted
Ivory Coast X
agen
Prote AG.

Eritrea X
Estonia X
Finland X
France X
French Overseas Territo‐ X
ries (not EU)
French Guyana X
Gabon X
Gambia X
Georgia X
Ghana X
Gibraltar X
Greece X
Great Britain and North‐ X
ern Ireland

46 3. Service work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Amarok ► 2012
Oil change intervals depending on sulphur content in fuel
Fuel quality (EN590) ◀ 500 ppm 500-2,000 ppm 2,000-4,000 ppm ► 4,000 ppm
Change interval ESI 20 tkm/1 year 10 tkm/1 year 7.5 tkm/1 year 5 tkm/1 year
Guadeloupe X
Guatemala X
Guinea X
Guinea-Bissau X
Guyana X
Haiti X
Honduras X
Hong Kong X
India X
Indonesia X
Iraq X
Iran X
Ireland X
Iceland X G. Volkswagen
A AG do
agen
Israel Volksw X es n
ot g
by ua
Italy orised
X ran
tee
h
Jamaica aut or
ac X
ss
Japan X
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an

Yemen X
itte

y li
erm

ab

Jordan X
ility
ot p

Cambodia X
wit
, is n

h re

Cameroon X
hole

spec

Canada X
es, in part or in w

t to the co

Cap Verde X
Caribbean driving on the X
rrectness of i

left
Caribbean driving on the X
l purpos

right
Kazakhstan X
nf
ercia

or

Qatar X
m
m

atio
m

Kenya X
o

n in
or c

Kyrgyz Republic X
thi
te

sd
iva

Columbia X
o
r
rp

cu
o

Comoros X
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
Croatia X C py
t. rig
gh ht
Cuba X
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
Kuwait X
cted agen
Prote AG.

Laos X
Lesotho X
Latvia X
Lebanon X
Liberia X
Libya X
Lithuania X

3. Service work 47
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
byV gu
ara
Amarok 2011 ➤ rised
nte
o eo
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
aut
h
ra
ss c

ce
e
nl
Amarok ► 2012

pt
du

an
itte

y li
Oil change intervals depending on sulphur content in fuel

erm

ab
ility
Fuel quality (EN590) ◀ 500 ppm 500-2,000 ppm 2,000-4,000 ppm ► 4,000 ppm

ot p

wit
, is n
Change interval ESI 20 tkm/1 year 10 tkm/1 year 7.5 tkm/1 year 5 tkm/1 year

h re
hole

spec
Luxembourg X
es, in part or in w

t to the co
Madagascar X
Malawi X
Malaysia X

rrectness of i
Mali X
l purpos

Malta X
Morocco X

nform
ercia

Martinique X
m

at
om

io
Mauritania X

n
c

in t
or

Mauritius X

his
ate

do
riv

Mayotte X
p

cum
for

en
g

Macedonia X
n

t.
yi Co
op
Mexico X
C py
ht. rig
rig ht
by
Moldova X
copy Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Mongolia Prote
X
AG.

Montenegro X
Mozambique X
Mozambique X
Myanmar (Burma) X
Namibia X
Nepal X
New Caledonia X
New Zealand X
Nicaragua X
Netherlands X
Dutch Overseas Territo‐ X
ries
Niger X
Nigeria X
North Korea X
Norway X
Oman X
Austria X
Pakistan X
Palestinian Territories X
Panama X
Papua New Guinea X
Paraguay X
Pacific driving on the left X
Pacific driving on the right X
Peru
Philippines X X
Poland X
Portugal X

48 3. Service work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Amarok ► 2012
Oil change intervals depending on sulphur content in fuel
Fuel quality (EN590) ◀ 500 ppm 500-2,000 ppm 2,000-4,000 ppm ► 4,000 ppm
Change interval ESI 20 tkm/1 year 10 tkm/1 year 7.5 tkm/1 year 5 tkm/1 year
Puerto Rico agen
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes X
olksw not
Republic of Congo d by
V gu
ara X
ise nte
Reunion X uthor eo
ra
a
Rwanda ss c
X

ce
e
nl

Romania X

pt
du

an
itte

y li
Russian Federation X
erm

ab
ility
Saint-Barthélemy X
ot p

wit
, is n

Zambia X

h re
hole

spec
Sao Tome and Príncipe X
es, in part or in w

Saudi Arabia X

t to the co
Sweden X
Switzerland X

rrectness of i
Senegal X
l purpos

Serbia X
Seychelles X

nf
ercia

or
Sierra Leone X

m
m

atio
m

Zimbabwe X
o

n in
or c

thi
Singapore X
te

sd
iva

Slovakia X

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

Slovenia X
en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
Somalia X
C py
t. rig
gh ht
yri
Spain X
p by
o Vo
by c lksw
cted agen
Sri Lanka and the Mal‐ Prote X
AG.
dives
South Africa X
Sudan X
South Korea X
Surinam X
Swaziland X
Syria X
Tajikistan X
Taiwan X
Tanzania X
Thailand X
Togo X
Trinidad and Tobago X
Chad X
Czech Republic X
Tunisia X
Turkey X
Turkmenistan X
Uganda X
Ukraine X
Hungary X

3. Service work 49
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Amarok ► 2012
Oil change intervals depending on sulphur content in fuel
Fuel quality (EN590) ◀ 500 ppm 500-2,000 ppm 2,000-4,000 ppm ► 4,000 ppm
Change interval ESI 20 tkm/1 year 10 tkm/1 year 7.5 tkm/1 year 5 tkm/1 year
Uruguay X
USA-1 federal states X
without CARB require‐
ment
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
USA-2 federal states with olkswage es n
ot g X
CARB requirement byV ua
ed ran
ris
Uzbekistan utho tee
or X
a ac
Venezuela ss X

ce
e
nl

United Arab Emirates X

pt
du

an
itte

y li
Vietnam X
erm

ab
ility
Belarus X
ot p

wit
, is n

West Sahara X

h re
hole

spec
Central African Republic X
es, in part or in w

Cyprus X

t to the co
rrectness of i
3.3 Scopes of service
l purpos

The following chapter contains the well-known service tables of


the Volkswagen Commercial Vehicles brand. Since, in the past,
nform
ercia

individual service specifications were set up in various markets,


mostly through severe operating conditions, these are listed in the
m

at
om

scopes of service tables with market specific deviations.


on
c

in t
or

♦ Scopes of service ⇒ page 53


his
ate

do
riv

♦ Scopes of service market specific deviations ⇒ page 55


p

cum
for

en
ng

♦ Delivery inspection ⇒ page 50


t.
yi Co
Cop py
. rig
♦ Time and distance dependent additional work ⇒ page 56
ht ht
rig by
copy Vo
lksw
3.3.1 Delivery inspection
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

♦ The sequence of the individual service tasks has been tested


and optimised. The sequence must be followed in order to
avoid unnecessary interruptions in work.
Work to be completed Page
Electrics
♦ Relay for battery disconnection (if fitted): remove ⇒ page 84
• Vehicles with transport equipment

♦ Battery: Check battery terminal clamps by hand for tightness ⇒ page 81

♦ Battery: Perform visual check and check magic eye (if fitted) ⇒ page 84

♦ Four-wheel drive fuse: Insert (PR number “1x1”) ⇒ page 107

♦ Vehicle system test: Perform ⇒ page 104

♦ Radio code: Request (customer should be informed of radio code IF DESIRED) ⇒ page 131

Vehicle interior

50 3. Service work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Work to be completed Page


♦ All switches, electrical consumers, sockets, gauges and other control elements: Check
function

♦ Door handles, door locks, central locking and windows: Check function and ease of
movement agen
AG. Volkswagen AG d
o
ksw es n
Vol ot g
by ua
♦ Front passenger airbags: Check key switch and ed“ON/OFF function”, set switch to “ON” ran ⇒ page 88
oris tee
th or
u
♦ Electric window regulators: Check positioning
ss
a
(open and close functions) ⇒apage
c 102

ce
e
nl

pt
du
♦ Clock: Set to correct time ⇒ page 146

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
♦ Climatronic: Set temperature to 22 ℃ ⇒ page 101

ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
♦ Transportation mode: Switch off
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

♦ Radio/radio navigation system: Activate anti-theft coding, store local radio stations to ⇒ page 133

t to the co
station buttons

♦ Radio navigation system: Insert navigation CD/DVD and perform update ⇒ page 134

rrectness of i
♦ Seat protective covers and protective foils: Remove
l purpos

♦ Vehicle interior: Check for cleanliness (front and rear seats, interior trim, carpets/mats,

nf
ercia

windows)

orm
m

atio
m

Vehicle exterior
o

n in
or c

♦ All equipment that has been packed inside the vehicle (mats, wipers, spoilers, roof aerial,

thi
te

sd
a

full sized wheel trims/wheel trims, wheel bolt covers, tyre valve extensions): Install (if
iv

o
r
rp

cu
featured)
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
♦ Edge protection on doors (plastic foil): Remove Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
yri by
♦ Vehicle exterior: Check for cleanliness (paintwork, decorative parts, windows, wiper
op Vo
by c lksw
cted
blades, surfaces)
agen
Prote AG.

♦ Protective foil: Remove (if fitted) ⇒ page 146

♦ Towing eyes: remove


• Place towing eye in vehicle tool kit and fit cover to bumper

Tyres
♦ Spare wheel tyre: Check condition and inflation pressure (if fitted) ⇒ page 89

♦ Front left tyre: Check condition and inflation pressure ⇒ page 89

♦ Rear left tyre: Check condition and inflation pressure ⇒ page 89

♦ Rear right tyre: Check condition and inflation pressure ⇒ page 89

♦ Front right tyre: Check condition and inflation pressure ⇒ page 89

♦ Wheel securing bolts: Tighten to specified torque ⇒ page 130

Vehicle, bottom
♦ Vehicle from below (without removing underbody protection): Perform visual check for ⇒ page 146
leaks and damage ⇒ page 110
♦ Engine, CV joint boots/bellows, brake system, steering, axles, gearbox/final drive, ho‐
ses, fluid reservoirs/containers

3. Service work 51
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Work to be completed Page


♦ Vehicle underside (floor pan): Perform visual check for damage ⇒ page 146

♦ Brake system: Perform visual check for leaks and damage ⇒ page 92

Engine compartment
♦ Engine and components in engine compartment (from above): Perform visual check for ⇒ page 126
leaks and damage

♦ Window wash/wipe system and headlight washer system: Check function and settings; ⇒ page 134
replenish to maximum level

♦ Engine oil level: Check (observe VW engine oil standards if replenishing) ⇒ page 122

♦ Coolant level: Check level is at maximum ⇒ page 115

♦ Brake fluid: Change ⇒ page 100


• For stock vehicles and vehicles in storage whose standing period of 6 months or more,
the brake fluid must be renewed.

♦ Brake fluid level: Check level is at maximum ⇒ page 100

♦ Power assisted steering: Check fluid level ⇒ page 144

Documentation/final checks
♦ Number and function of keys: Check, wipe off grease if necessary

♦ Vehicle data sticker: Stick into service schedule and in vehicle ⇒ page 59

♦ Service schedule: Enter delivery inspection, enter a cross for the 1st service and com‐
plete vehicle data in service schedule, see “Vehicle delivery documentation”
♦ Interval service for vehicles with LongLife service (PR No. QG1) 1)
♦ Oil change service for vehicles with time or distance dependent
AG. Voservice
lkswagen(PR
AG doNo. QG0/
agen
QG2) 1) yV
olksw es n
ot g
b ua
ed ran
ris tee
♦ Vehicle literature: Check literature is complete
tho and prepare for handover to customer or
au ac
ss
♦ Reset service interval display ⇒ page 141
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li

♦ Road test: Perform ⇒ page 129


erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

1) Service identification
h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote
52
AG.
3. Service work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

3.3.2 Scopes of service

Note

♦ The various types of service can be combined under certain


circumstances (oil change or interval service in conjunction
with an inspection service). Whereupon doubly listed activities
are only charged once.
♦ Depending on the vehicle equipment and the conditions under
which the vehicle is used, additional maintenance measures
may need to be performed when services are due.
♦ It is possible to have additional work done outside the service
intervals, with account being taken of the entries in the service
schedule (or service sticker: “Your next service dates”).
♦ If faults are found within the scope of servicing which make
repair measures necessary, the customer must be informed
and the additional work invoiced separately where necessary.
G. Volkswage
♦ Abbreviations for l
scope
ksw
agen of service: AG does
A n
not
Vo gu
by
♦ 1) Oil: Oil 2)
ris change service, Int.: Interval service,
d ara
e nte
ho eo
♦ 3) ut
Insp.:
ss
a Inspection service ra
c
ce
le
un

Oil Int. Insp. Measure


pt
an
d
itte

1) 2) 3)
y li
erm

ab
ility

Electrics
ot p

wit
is n

X ♦ Front lights - Check function: Side lights, dipped beam, main beam, fog lights, turn signals,
h re
ole,

hazard warning lights


spec
urposes, in part or in wh

⇒ page 138
t to the co

X ♦ Rear lights - Check function: brake lights (including 3rd brake light), tail lights, reversing
lights, rear fog light, number plate light, turn signals, hazard warning lights
rrectne

X ♦ Interior, luggage and glove compartment lights, cigarette lighter, sockets, horn and warn‐
ing lamps: Check function
ss o
cial p

X ♦ Battery: Perform visual check and check magic eye


inform
mer

⇒ page 84
atio
om

Vehicle exterior
n
c

i
or

n thi
e

X ♦ Doors: Grease door arrester


t

sd
iva

o
pr

⇒ page 145
um
r
fo

en
ng

X ♦ Windscreen wash and wipe system: Check function, spray jet settings and for damage,
t.
yi Co
op
adjust if necessary
C py
t. rig
gh ht
yri by
⇒ page 134
cop Vo
by lksw
cted agen
X ♦ Wiper blades: Check for damage and park position, adjust as necessary
Prote AG.

⇒ page 137
X ♦ Paint: Perform visual check for damage and corrosion, interior and exterior when doors
and bonnet/rear lid/flaps are open
⇒ page 145
X • Bonnet catch: Clean, ensure attachment is secure and lubricate
⇒ page 6
X X • Windscreen: Perform visual check for damage

Tyres

3. Service work 53
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Oil Int. Insp. Measure


1) 2) 3)

X ♦ Tread depth, condition, wear pattern, age, inflation pressure (including spare tyre):
Check, rectify as necessary
⇒ page 89
Vehicle from below
X ♦ Engine and components in engine compartment (from below), gearbox, final drive, rear
axle and protective bellows: Perform visual check for leaks and damage
♦ If fluid loss is greater than can be expected through normal use, determine cause and
rectify using a special order
AG. Volkswagen A
⇒ page 126 wage
n G do
es n
Volks ot g
y
X ♦ Underbody:
ise
d Visual check for damage to underbody
b ua
ran protection and underbody trim/panels
r tee
ho
⇒ page au146
t or
ac
ss
X ♦ Exhaust system: Visual check for leaks, security and damage

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
X ♦ Check track rod ends:
erm

ab
ility
ot p

♦ play, attachment and damage to boots/bellows

wit
, is n

h re
⇒ page 144
hole

spec
X ♦ CV joints, axial bearings, coupling rod bearings and anti-roll bar rubber bushes: Visual
es, in part or in w

check for damage

t to the co
⇒ page 79
X ♦ Brake system: Perform visual check for leaks and damage

rrectness of i
⇒ page 92
l purpos

X X ♦ Thickness of brake pads and condition of front brake discs and rear drum brake linings:
check
nform
ercia

⇒ page 93
m

at
om

io

Engine compartment
n
c

in t
or

X ♦ Engine oil level: Check, observe oil specification when topping up!
his
ate

do
riv

⇒ page 122
p

cum
for

en
g

X ♦ Engine and components in engine compartment (from above): Perform visual check for
n

t.
yi Co
op
leaks and damage C py
t. rig
gh ht
yri
⇒ page 126
p by
co Vo
by lksw
cted
X X ♦ Engine oil: Change and renew oil filter, ensure level is at maximum after filling system
agen
Prote AG.
and replenish if necessary
• Note VW engine oil standards
⇒ page 122
X ♦ Brake fluid: Change (after 3 years from initial registration and then every 2 years)
⇒ page 95
X ♦ Brake fluid level (depending on lining wear): Check (observe specification )
⇒ page 100
X ♦ Brake system and shock absorbers: Perform visual check for leaks and damage
⇒ page 95
X ♦ Power assisted steering: Check fluid level
⇒ page 144
X ♦ Air filter with saturation indicator in dash panel insert: Check
• In countries with high levels of dust, a new dust and pollen filter must be fitted as a sep‐
arate job order
⇒ page 118

54 3. Service work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Oil Int. Insp. Measure


1) 2) 3)

X ♦ Cooling system: Check frost protection and coolant level, replenish if necessary
• Specified antifreeze value: “-25 °C” In countries with an arctic climate “-35 °C”
⇒ page 115
Final checks
X ♦ Headlight adjustment: Check, if necessary adjust

X ♦ Vehicle system test: Perform

X X ♦ Reset service interval display

X X X ♦ “Your next service” sticker: Enter next due date 1) and attach service sticker to driver side
door pillar (B-pillar)

X ♦ Breakdown set (if fitted): Check (renew tyre inflation bottle with sealant if use-by date has
expired)

X X ♦ Road test: Perform

3.3.3 Scopes of service, market specific devi‐


ations
This chapter only contains market-specific differences. This
means that all the service activities or time and distance depend‐
ant additional work not listed here are listed in the normal scope
of service work.
♦ Argentinian market from model year 2011 ⇒ page 55
Volkswa
♦ Brazilan market from model
swayear 2011 ⇒ page 55
gen AG
. gen AG
does
olk not
yV gu
♦ Chinese market from ise
d b model year 2011 ⇒ page 56 ara
nte
r
tho eo
au ra
Argentina market
ss from model year 2011 c
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an

Additional work Interval Description of


itte

y li
erm

work
ab
ility
ot p

♦ Brake fluid: Change (comply with specification ) Every 2 years ⇒ page 95


wit
, is n

h re

• Check whether brake fluid service is due.


hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co

♦ Dust and pollen filter (cabin filter): Clean housing and renew filter Every 30,000 km ⇒ page 110
element
rrectness of i

♦ Air filter: Clean housing and renew filter element Every 30,000 km ⇒ page 118
l purpos

– Reset programmed values in engine control unit -J623-


♦ Spark plugs: Renew Every 90,000 km or ⇒ page 149
6 years
nform
ercia

♦ Fuel filter: Renew – if vehicle runs on diesel fuel every 10,000 km or ⇒ page 113
m

at
om

6 months
ion
c

in t
r

♦ Camshaft drive toothed belt: Check every 10,000 km or ⇒ page 148


o

his
te

6 months
a

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
Brazil market from model year 2011 gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

3. Service work 55
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Additional work Interval Description of


work
♦ Brake fluid: Change (comply with specification ) Every 2 years ⇒ page 95
• Check whether brake fluid service is due.

♦ Air filter: Clean housing and renew filter element Every 90,000 km ⇒ page 118
or
– Reset programmed values in engine control unit -J623- 6 years
♦ Spark plugs: Renew Every 90,000 km ⇒ page 149
AG. Volkswagen AGor
swagen does
yV
olk 6 yearsnot gua
edb ra
♦ Fuel filter: Renew – if vehicle runs on diesel hfuel
or
is Every 60,000 km nte⇒ e page 113 t or
au ac
ss
♦ Camshaft drive toothed belt: Check every 10,000 km ⇒ page 148

ce
le

or
un

pt
an
d

6 months
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

China market from model year 2011

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
Additional work Interval Description of
work

rrectne
♦ Spark plugs: Renew Every 20,000 km ⇒ page 149

ss o
cial p

f inform
3.3.4 Time and distance dependent additional
mer

atio
work
om

n
c

i
or

n
♦ Depending on conditions under which the vehicle is used and

thi
te

sd
a

vehicle equipment, extra service work must be performed in


iv

o
pr

c
addition to the inspection service or oil change service/interval
um
r
fo

service. These additional maintenance measures are invoiced


en
ng

t.
yi Co
separately and are marked as extra work. t. Cop py
rig
gh ht
yri
Measure: Interval
p by
o Vo
by c lksw
cted agen
• Thickness of brake pads and condition of front Prote
Recommendation: 1)
AG.
brake discs and rear drum brake linings: check

♦ Fuel filter: Renew – if vehicle runs on diesel fuel Every 10,000 km


• That does not conform with standard “DIN EN 590”
• and has an elevated sulphur content (>2000 ppm)
⇒ page 113
♦ Fuel filter: Drain water - if vehicle runs on diesel fuel Every 20,000 km
• That does not conform with standard “DIN EN 590”
⇒ page 114
♦ Camshaft drive toothed belt: Check Every 40,000 km
• Valid in “dusty” regions, diesel engines
⇒ page 148
♦ Fuel filter: Renew – if vehicle runs on diesel fuel
• That does not conform with standard “DIN EN 590”
⇒ page 113

56 3. Service work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Measure: Interval
♦ Dust and pollen filter (cabin filter): Clean housing Every 60,000 km
and renew filter element
⇒ page 110
♦ Spark plugs: Renew wage
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
es n
lks ot g
Vo
⇒ page 149 d by ua
ran
ir se tee
♦ Air filter: Clean housing and renew filter elementutho
or
(reset learnt values of engine control unit -J623-
ss
a
) ac

ce
le
un
♦ Valid in “dusty” regions

pt
an
d
itte

y li
• In countries with high levels of dust, a new dust and

erm

ab
pollen filter must be fitted as a separate job order

ility
ot p

wit
is n
⇒ page 118

h re
ole,

♦ Fuel filter: Renew – if vehicle runs on diesel fuel Every 80,000 km

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
♦ Conforming to “DIN EN 590”

rrectne
⇒ page 113
♦ Air filter: Clean housing and renew filter element Every 120,000 km

s
(reset learnt values of engine control unit -J623- )

s o
cial p

f in
⇒ page 118

form
mer

♦ Camshaft drive toothed belt and toothed belt ten‐

atio
m

sioning roller: Renew


o

n
c

i
or

n thi
• Valid in “dusty” regions, diesel engines
te

sd
iva

o
r

⇒ page 148
p

cum
r
fo

en
ng

♦ Poly V-belt: Check condition


t.
yi Co
Cop py
⇒ page 111
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
♦ Poly V-belt: Renew Every 180,000 km
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.
• Applies for petrol engines
⇒ page 112
♦ Toothed belt for water pump: renew
• Applies to petrol engines
⇒ page 148
♦ Toothed belt for balancer shaft: renew
• Applies to petrol engines
⇒ page 148
♦ Diesel particulate filter (if fitted): Interrogate ash At 200,000 km then every 40,000 km
mass (saturation level)
⇒ page 80
♦ Camshaft drive toothed belt and toothed belt ten‐ Every 210,000 km
sioning roller: Renew
• Valid for diesel engines
⇒ page 148
♦ Timing chain: Renew Every 300,000 km
• Applies for petrol engines
⇒ page 134

3. Service work 57
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Measure: Interval
♦ Camshaft drive toothed belt: Check Every 2 years
• Valid in “dusty” regions, diesel engines
⇒ page 148
♦ Dust and pollen filter (cabin filter): Clean housing
and renew filter element
⇒ page 110
♦ Air filter: Clean housing and renew filter element Every 3 years
(reset learnt values of engine control unit -J623- )
♦ Valid in “dusty” regions
• In countries with high levels of dust, a new dust and
pollen filter must be fitted as a separate job order

♦ Emissions test: Perform (every 12 months in Ger‐ 3 years after initial registration and then every 2 years
many for commercial passenger transport, e.g.
taxis)
. Volkswage
⇒ page 152 wage
n AG n AG d
oes
olks no
♦ Fuel filter: Renewby – if vehicle runs on diesel fuel t gua
V
Every 4 years
ed ra nte
ris
• That does ho eo
aut not conform with standard “DIN EN 590” ra
ss c
⇒ page 113
ce
le
un

pt
an
d

♦ Spark plugs: Renew


itte

y li
rm

ab

⇒ page 149
pe

ility
ot

wit

♦ Air filter: Clean housing and renew filter element Every 6 years
, is n

h re

(reset learnt values of engine control unit -J623- )


hole

spec

⇒ page 118
es, in part or in w

t to the co

♦ Fuel filter: Renew – if vehicle runs on diesel fuel


• Conforming to “DIN EN 590”
rrectness of i

⇒ page 113
l purpos

1) Check thickness of front and rear brake pads/lining. If the


brakes are subjected to regular or severe stress (e.g. vehicle op‐
nform
ercia

erated in mountainous regions, frequent driving with a full load,


vehicle used for courier service), we recommend as a precau‐
m

a
com

ti

tionary measure that the thickness of the brake pads be checked


on in

by a qualified workshop 15,000 km after the last service at the


r
te o

thi

latest.
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

58 3. Service work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

4 General
♦ Sticker ⇒ page 62
♦ Entries in service schedule ⇒ page 63
♦ Severe conditions ⇒ page 60
♦ Vehicle identification number (chassis number) ⇒ page 59
♦ Vehicle data sticker ⇒ page 59
♦ Engine code and engine number ⇒ page 60
♦ Countries with high levels of dust ⇒ page 60

4.1 Vehicle identification number (chassis


number)
A vehicle identification number is located behind the windscreen
on the driver side.
Second vehicle identification number is located on right side of
longitudinal member and can be seen in right wheel housing
-arrow-.

Significance of vehicle identification


agen
Anumber
G. Volkswagen AG d
o
ksw es n
Vol ot g
WV1 ZZZ d by 2H Z ua
ran B D 000 234
ise tee
or
Manufacturer Filler
au
th charac‐ Type Filler charac‐ Model or a year Production lo‐ Serial number
code ss ters ters 2011
c cation
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab

4.2 Vehicle data sticker


ility
ot p

wit
, is n

The vehicle data sticker -arrow- is attached to the left A-pillar low‐
h re
hole

er trim panel in the footwell.


spec
es, in part or in w

This vehicle data sticker is also found in the service schedule for
t to the co

the customer.
On the left side of left-hand drives, on the right side of right-hand
rrectness of i

drives.
l purpos

Attach second “vehicle data sticker” in customer service schedule


⇒ page 62
nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

4. General 59
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

The sticker shows the following vehicle data.


1 - Vehicle identification number (chassis number)
2 - Vehicle type, engine output, gearbox
3 - Engine and gearbox code letters, paint number, interior equip‐
ment
4 - Optional equipment, PR numbers

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
by
4.3 Severe operating conditionsorised ara
nte
eo
h
ut ra
If the vehicle is used under severess operating conditions some jobs
a c
will have to be performed before the next service due or at shorter

ce
e
nl

pt
service intervals.
du

an
itte

y li
erm

Severe operating conditions

ab
ility
ot p

• Regular short trips or stop and go operation in urban traffic

wit
, is n

h re
• High percentage of cold starts
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

• Vehicle is used in areas with extremely low temperatures over

t to the co
a long period
• Frequent long periods with the engine idling (e.g. taxi)

rrectness of i
• Vehicle is often driven at full throttle with high payload or whilst
l purpos

towing a trailer
• Using diesel with elevated sulphur content

nform
ercia

• Regular operation in areas with high levels of dust


m

at
om

i
4.4 Engine code and engine number
on
c

in t
or

his
e

Engine code and engine number are located:


at

do
priv

cum

♦ On a sticker on toothed belt guard ⇒ Rep. gr. 00 ,


for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
♦ On vehicle data sticker on left A-pillar lower trim panel in the Cop py
footwell ⇒ page 59 .
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
♦ On vehicle data sticker in service schedule for the customer. by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

4.5 Countries with high levels of dust


The countries with high levels of dust are indicated in this chapter.
Country Dusty country
Abu Dhabi X
Afghanistan X
Egypt X
Algeria X
Angola X
Equatorial Guinea X
Argentina X
Armenia X
Azerbaijan X
Ethiopia X
Australia X
Bangladesh X

60 4. General
n AG. Volkswagen AG do Amarok 2011 ➤
lkswage es n
d byV
o ot g
ua Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
ran
ir se tee
tho
or
Country au Dusty country ac
ss

ce
le
Belize X
un

pt
an
Benin d X
itte

y li
rm

ab
Bhutan X
pe

ility
ot

wit
Bolivia X
, is n

h re
hole

Botswana X

spec
es, in part or in w

Brazil X

t to the co
China X
Guinea-Bissau X

rrectness of i
Guyana X
l purpos

India X
Israel X

nform
ercia

Yemen X
m

a
Jordan X
com

tion in
Cambodia X
r
te o

thi
s
iva

Cameroon X

do
r
rp

cum
Kazakhstan X
fo

en
ng

t.
yi
Canada X
Co
Cop py
t. rig
Qatar X
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
Kenya Prote
cted X AG.
agen

Kuwait X
Laos X
Lesotho X
Lebanon X
Liberia X
Libya X
Madagascar X
Malawi X
Mali X
Singapore X
Somalia X
Sri Lanka/Maledives, X
South Africa, Sudan
Surinam X
Swaziland X
Tanzania X
Thailand X
Togo X
Chad X
Tunisia X
Turkey X
Turkmenistan X
USA-2 X
Uzbekistan X
Venezuela X
United Arab Emirates X
Vietnam X
Belarus X

4. General 61
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Country Dusty country


West Sahara X

4.6 Sticker
♦ Attaching service sticker “Your next service dates”
⇒ page 62 .
♦ Attaching “vehicle data sticker” into customer service schedule
and in vehicle ⇒ page 62

4.6.1 Attaching service sticker “Your next


service dates”
Service sticker “Your next service dates”
– Enter next service due: Enter a cross according to “service
interval display” and enter date and odometer reading.

n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
ir se tee
tho
u or
a ac
– Apply service sticker on driver side door pillar (B-pillar).
ss

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
rrectnes

4.6.2 Attaching “vehicle data sticker” into cus‐


s o
cial p

f i

tomer service schedule and in vehicle


nform
mer

atio

Perform the following jobs:


om

n
c

i
or

– Attach upper vehicle data sticker -arrow- in customer service


thi
e

schedule.
t

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

62 4. General
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Installation position of vehicle data sticker ⇒ page 59


1 - Week of production
2 - PR number

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
aut ra
ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

4.7 Entries in service schedule

wit
is n

h re
ole,

♦ If a component such as the toothed belt is replaced and is

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

subject to a replacement interval stipulated by the manufac‐

t to the co
turer,
♦ the time period for the new replacement interval starts when
the replacement is carried out.

rrectne
♦ Therefore it is very important, every time a component is
changed, to document this in the service schedule. This also ss o
applies to components which were changed before the regular
cial p

f i

change interval.
nform
mer

♦ There are more entries to be made in the service schedule


atio
m

⇒ page 145 .
o

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

Note
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi
♦ When using genuine parts kits, it must be taken into account
Co
op py
whether it is technically necessary to change all the compo‐
t. C rig
gh ht
yri
nents included in the genuine parts kits. p by
o Vo
by c lksw
cted agen
♦ If more components are renewed than is technically necessa‐ Prote AG.
ry, inform the customer before repair!

4. General 63
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
ksw not
Amarok 2011 ➤ by Vol
gu
ara
d
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012 orise nte
eo
th
au ra
ss c

ce
5 Descriptions of work

le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
♦ Swivel joints: Visual check ⇒ page 79

rm

ab
pe

ility
♦ Four-wheel drive: Insert fuse ⇒ page 107

ot

wit
, is n

h re
♦ Lifting the vehicle ⇒ page 65

hole

spec
es, in part or in w
♦ Reading ash mass (saturation level) of diesel particulate filter

t to the co
⇒ page 80
♦ Battery: Check battery terminal clamps for secure seating
⇒ page 81 .

rrectness of i
♦ Battery: Check magic eye ⇒ page 84
l purpos

♦ Battery: Perform visual check ⇒ page 84

nform
ercia

♦ Removing relay for battery disconnection (if fitted)


m

⇒ page 84

a
com

tion in
♦ Front passenger front airbag: Check key switch and “On/Off
r
te o

thi
function” ⇒ page 88 .

s
iva

do
r
rp

c
♦ Checking tyres: Condition, wear pattern, tyre pressure, tread

um
fo

depth ⇒ page 89

en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
♦ Brake system: Perform visual check for leaks and damage
C py
t. rig
gh
⇒ page 92
ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted
♦ Brake fluid level: Check ⇒ page 100
agen
Prote AG.

♦ Brake fluid: Change ⇒ page 95


♦ Climatronic: Set temperature to 22 °C ⇒ page 101
♦ Thickness of brake pads and condition of front brake discs and
rear drum brake linings: check ⇒ page 93
♦ Window regulators: Check positioning (open and close func‐
tions) ⇒ page 102
♦ Performing vehicle system test ⇒ page 104
♦ Connecting vehicle diagnosis tester ⇒ page 102
♦ Bonnet catch: Clean, ensure attachment is secure and lubri‐
cate ⇒ page 127
♦ Protective bellows: Visual check ⇒ page 110
♦ Poly V-belt: Check condition ⇒ page 111
♦ Fuel system: Bleed (diesel engine) ⇒ page 114
♦ Fuel filter: Drain water (diesel engine) ⇒ page 114
♦ Fuel filter: Renew (diesel engine) ⇒ page 113
♦ Cooling system: Check frost protection and coolant level
⇒ page 115
♦ Paint: Perform visual check for damage and corrosion, interior
and exterior when doors and bonnet/rear lid/flaps are open
⇒ page 145
♦ Steering: Check bellows/boots for leaks and damage
⇒ page 151
♦ Air filter: Clean housing and renew filter element
⇒ page 118
♦ Air filter with saturation indicator: Check saturation indicator
⇒ page 121

64 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

♦ Engine and components in engine compartment (from above


and below): Perform visual check for leaks and damage
⇒ page 126
♦ Engine oil: Drain or extract; renew oil filter and replenish en‐
gine oil ⇒ page 122
♦ Oil level: Check ⇒ page 122
♦ Check breakdown set ⇒ page 128 .
♦ Performing road test ⇒ page 129
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
♦ Wheel securing bolts: Tighten to specified torque olks
wage es n
ot g
⇒ page 130 db
y V ua
ran
e
ris tee
♦ Reading radio code (only valid for vehicles without
utho sticker with or
serial number and radio code on vehicle datass sticker)
a ac
⇒ page 131

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
♦ Radio / radio navigation system: Enter anti-theft coding PIN
itte

y li
erm

⇒ page 133 .

ab
ility
ot p

♦ Radio navigation system: Insert navigation CD/DVD and per‐

wit
, is n

form update ⇒ page 134

h re
hole

spec
♦ Doors: Grease door arrester ⇒ page 145
es, in part or in w

t to the co
♦ Windscreen wash/wipe system and headlight washer system:
Check function and settings ⇒ page 134

rrectness of i
♦ Windscreen wiper blades: Check park position ⇒ page 137 .
l purpos

♦ Headlight adjustment: Check, if necessary adjust


⇒ page 138

nf
ercia

♦ Service interval display: Reset ⇒ page 141

orm
m

♦ Service interval display: Adapt (export) ⇒ page 143

atio
om

n in
c

♦ Power assisted steering: Check fluid level ⇒ page 144


or

thi
te

sd
a

♦ Track rod ends: Check clearance, security and boots


iv

o
r
rp

cu
⇒ page 144
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi
♦ Dust and pollen filter: Clean housing and renew filter element
Co
op py
⇒ page 110
t. C rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
♦ Clock: Set to correct time ⇒ page 146
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
♦ Underbody protection: Perform visual check for damage
⇒ page 146
♦ Removing and installing skid plate ⇒ page 150
♦ Camshaft drive toothed belt: Check condition ⇒ page 148
♦ Camshaft drive toothed belt: Renew ⇒ page 148
♦ Spark plugs: Renew ⇒ page 149

5.1 Lifting the vehicle


♦ Safety notes ⇒ page 66
♦ Lifting the vehicle ⇒ page 66
♦ Alternative ways of lifting the vehicle ⇒ page 73
♦ Additional support of vehicle ⇒ page 77

5. Descriptions of work 65
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
r
Amarok 2011 ➤ ut
ho eo
ra
a
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012 ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
5.1.1 Safety notes

itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p
WARNING

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
♦ Before driving onto a lifting platform, ensure that there is

es, in part or in w
sufficient clearance between low-lying vehicle compo‐

t to the co
nents and lifting platform.
♦ Before driving a vehicle onto a lifting platform it must be

rrectness of i
ensured that the vehicle weight does not exceed the per‐
missible lifting capacity of the platform. l purpos
♦ Vehicle may be lifted only at points indicated in figure to
avoid damaging vehicle underbody or tipping vehicle.

nf
ercia

or
♦ Never start engine when vehicle is raised and do not en‐

m
m

atio
gage a gear in gearbox even if only one driven wheel is
om

n in
touching floor. Disregarding these warnings risks the dan‐
or c

ger of an accident!

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r

♦ Depending on the vehicle load, the mechanic must always


rp

cu
o

m
decide whether to strap the vehicle down on the lifting
f

en
ng

t.
yi
platform or not.
Co
Cop py
t. rig
♦ If the vehicle is not strapped down, there is a great danger
gh ht
pyri by
that the vehicle will slip off the lifting platform.
o Vo
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
♦ Laden vehicles are only allowed to be raised using wheel
lifts as main support. If wheels need to be removed, it is
also permissible to lift laden vehicles by means of pris‐
matic supports under the rear axle tube. If this is not
possible because work is to be performed on rear axle, the
load must be removed from the vehicle.
♦ If vehicle is jacked up with a workshop jack in order to work
underneath it, it must be securely supported using suitable
stands.

5.1.2 Lifting the vehicle


This chapter indicates different ways of lifting the vehicle. Please
comply with the safety notes in chapter ⇒ page 66 and the in‐
structions for lifting the vehicle.

66 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note

♦ Raising vehicle with wheel lifts should mainly be done for all
assembly work on vehicle.
♦ Only use support points listed in document when assembly
work is performed on running gear or on axles.
♦ Vehicle must under no circumstances be raised on sills, oth‐
erwise its body will be seriously damaged.
G. Volkswagen AG d
♦ When work is to be done on the running gear (front axlelkand
swa
gen A oes
rear axle), raising the vehicle with jacks under the rear y Vaxle
o not
gu
db ara
should only be done as an alternative to the main rismethod of
e nte
supporting the vehicle! aut
ho eo
ra
ss c
♦ If work is to be done on the running gear, e.g. removal of front

ce
e
axle and rear axle, another way of raising the vehicle is to use nl

pt
du

an
jacks in front of the rear axle tube.
itte

y li
erm

ab
♦ The vehicle may only be lifted at points indicated in order to

ility
ot p

avoid damaging vehicle and to prevent vehicle from tipping.

wit
, is n

h re
♦ Vehicle must under no circumstances be raised on sills, oth‐
hole

spec
erwise its body will be seriously damaged.
es, in part or in w

t to the co
♦ To avoid damage, make sure that no electrical cables, brake
lines or fuel lines become trapped.

rrectness of i
♦ Laden vehicles must be unloaded before being raised.
l purpos

Raising vehicle with wheel lifts as main method of support


Perform the following jobs:

nform
mercia

– Reconfigure lifting platform so that existing 4 mounting plates

at
om

i
are replaced by 4 wheel lift supports -1-.

on
c

in t
or

– Adjust distances of lifting platform in relation to one another so

his
ate

do
riv

that all 4 wheels fit precisely into wheel lifts -2-.


p

cum
for

– Drive vehicle onto lifting platform until vehicle is located ex‐

en
ng

t.
yi
actly in wheel lifts.
Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5. Descriptions of work 67
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
aut ra
ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
– Vehicle can now be raised and lowered to required working
height.

rrectness o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

68 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
byV gu
ara
ed
ris nte
ho eo
aut ra
ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
Raising vehicle under rear axle tube
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Prismatic support with minimum opening angle 120°. Note that rrectness of i
the versions differ from one lifting platform manufacturer to
l purpos

another.
nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted
Perform the following jobs:
agen
Prote AG.

– Position rear support arms of lifting platform with prismatic


supports -1- as shown in illustration, exactly under rear axle
tube.
– Position front support arms of lifting platform with rubber plate
supports under front frame screw connection -2- and -3-.

5. Descriptions of work 69
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– If necessary, secure vehicle additionally with tensioning straps


-T10038- -4- directly on frame of front and rear support arms
of lifting platform.

n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
ir se tee
tho
u or
a ac
ss
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec

– Vehicle can now be raised and lowered to required working


es, in part or in w

height.
t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

70 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
rrectness o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
yri
Raising vehicle before rear axle tube
p by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Perform the following jobs:
Prote AG.

– Front support arms of lifting platform with rubber plate sup‐


ports are positioned in area of front bolted gearbox cross
member.
– Rear support arms of lifting platform with rubber plate supports
-1- are positioned in front of front leaf spring supports -2- under
vehicle frame.
– If necessary, vehicle can be additionally secured with tension‐
ing straps -T10038- -4- directly on frame of front and rear
support arms of lifting platform.

5. Descriptions of work 71
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
byV gu
ara
ed
ris nte
ho eo
aut ra
ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
rrectne
– Vehicle can now be raised and lowered to required working
height.
ss o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

72 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
byV gu
ara
ed
ris nte
ho eo
aut ra
ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5.1.3 Alternative ways of lifting the vehicle


This chapter indicates different ways of lifting the vehicle. Please
comply with the safety notes in chapter ⇒ page 66 and the in‐
structions for alternative ways of lifting the vehicle.

Note

♦ If work is to be done on the running gear, e.g. removal of front axle and rear axle, another way of raising the
vehicle is to use jacks in front of the rear axle tube.
♦ The vehicle may only be lifted at points indicated in order to avoid damaging vehicle and to prevent vehicle
from tipping.
♦ Laden vehicles must be unloaded before being raised.
♦ Vehicle must under no circumstances be raised on sills or front leaf spring supports, otherwise it will slip off
and its body could be seriously damaged.
♦ To avoid damage, make sure that no electrical cables, brake lines or fuel lines become trapped.

5. Descriptions of work 73
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Alternative lift for front of vehicle


Perform the following jobs:
– Front support arms -1- of lifting platform with rubber plate sup‐
ports are positioned in area of front bolted gearbox cross
member.
– If necessary, vehicle can be additionally secured with tension‐
ing straps -T10038- -2- directly on frame of front and rear
support arms of lifting platform.

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
byV gu
ara
ed
ris nte
ho eo
aut ra
ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

in t
r

– Vehicle can now be raised and lowered to required working


o

his
te

height.
a

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

74 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

Alternative lift for rear of vehicle


Perform the following jobs:
– Front support arms of lifting platform with rubber plate sup‐
ports are positioned in area of front bolted gearbox cross
member.
– The rear support arms of the lifting platform with anti-slip discs
-V.A.G 1994- -1- are positioned in front of the front leaf spring
support -2- under the vehicle frame.
– If necessary, vehicle can be additionally secured with tension‐
ing straps -T10038- -3- directly on frame of front and rear
support arms of lifting platform.

5. Descriptions of work 75
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
aut ra
ss c
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re

– Vehicle can now be raised and lowered to required working


hole

spec

height.
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

76 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
byV gu
ara
ed
ris nte
ho eo
aut ra
ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
rrectness o
cial p

f i
5.1.4 Additional support of vehicle

nform
mer

atio
om

n
c

Note i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

♦ Depending on assembly condition of vehicle, it can be secured


pr

cum
r
fo

using height-adjustable stands -2- in addition to lashing it to


en
ng

t.
support arms of lifting platform with tensioning straps -
yi Co
op
T10038- .
C py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
♦ To avoid damage, make sure that no electrical cables, brake
co Vo
by lksw
cted
lines or fuel lines become trapped.
agen
Prote AG.

Perform the following jobs:


– Place height-adjustable stands -1- for supporting vehicle un‐
der rear longitudinal member -arrows-.

5. Descriptions of work 77
. Volkswagen AG
gen AG does
Amarok 2011V➤ olks
wa not
y gu
Maintenance
ise
d b - Edition 10.2012 ara
nte
r
ho eo
aut ra
ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

a
com

tion in
r
te o

thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

– Alternatively, height-adjustable stands -2- can be positioned


under rear leaf spring bracket -1- on rear axle tube.

78 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
ut
5.2 Swivel joints: Visual check ss a ra
c
ce
le
un

Perform the following jobs:


pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
rrectness o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw

79
cted agen
Prote
5. Descriptions of work
AG.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
ir se
Amarok 2011 ➤ tho tee
or
u
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012 ss
a ac

ce
e
nl

pt
du
– Check boots -arrow- of lower swivel joints for leaks and dam‐

an
itte

y li
age.

erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nf
ercia

– Check boots -arrow- of upper swivel joints for leaks and dam‐

orm
age.
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

5.3 Reading ash mass (saturation level) of


diesel particulate filter

Note

♦ The ash mass test provides information on the saturation level


of the particulate filter volume.
♦ After a certain running time diesel particulate filters must be
exchanged, because of ash deposits.

Perform the following jobs:


– Pull on handbrake.
– Manual gearbox: Gear lever in neutral
– Connecting vehicle diagnosis tester ⇒ page 102
– Switch on ignition.
– Select the »Guided functions« field on the screen.
– Select "Engine" as the vehicle system and -J623- as the en‐
gine control unit; press Read.
– Read measured value block -J623-.
– Select measured value block 68, second measured value
»Ash mass« and confirm with the Done button.
– Follow instructions on display.
– End the test.
– Switch off ignition and detach vehicle diagnosis tester from the
vehicle.

80 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Axle mass DPF


Please observe the limits for maximum carbon black loading (val‐
ues are indicated in the following table):
Engine Emis‐ Limit for changing DPF First test for DPF exchange
sions (ash volume in ml or ash mass in (km or mi)
stand‐ g)
ard
2.0l, 4-cylinder EU5 175ml 200,000 km
TDI Common Rail

5.4 Battery: Check battery terminal clamps


for secure seating
♦ Specified torques: Battery ⇒ page 83
♦ Battery: Check battery terminal clamps for secure seating
⇒ page 81 .
♦ Battery terminal connections ⇒ page 83
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
Note d byV gu
ara
ise nte
or eo
th
♦ The battery terminal
s au clamps must only be connected by hand r ac
without using force, to ensure the battery housing is not dam‐
s
ce
le

aged.
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li

♦ Battery terminals must not be greased.


rm

ab
pe

ility

♦ Always adhere to the sequence of work steps.


ot

wit
, is n

h re

♦ Disconnecting the battery earth cable ensures safe working


hole

on the electrical system.


spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Torque wrench -V.A.G 1331/- (5-50 Nm)
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

a
com

tion in
r
te o

thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
5.4.1 Battery: Check battery terminal clamps
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote
for secure seating
AG.

Note

♦ In all vehicles a battery with “magic eye” and covered-over cell


sealing plugs or without cell sealing plugs is installed.
♦ A securely seated battery clamp ensures trouble free function
and long service life of the battery.
♦ The battery is located in engine compartment.

5. Descriptions of work 81
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Battery installation position ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 27


Perform the following jobs:
– Switch off ignition, all electrical consumers and withdraw igni‐
tion key.

Note

It can be necessary to remove battery positive terminal cover,


depending on equipment variant.

– Check whether battery clamps are secure on battery terminals


by moving battery negative cable -1- and battery positive cable
-2- back and forth.

WARNING

If the battery terminal clamp is not seated securely on the pos‐ agen
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
itive terminal, first disconnect battery terminal clamp from bat‐ olksw not
y V gu
tery negative terminal. ris
ed b ara
nt ee
tho or
s au ac
s
If the battery terminal clamp is not seated securely on positive

ce
e
nl

pt
du

terminal:

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
Perform the following jobs:

ility
ot p

– Disconnect battery terminal clamp -1- from battery negative

wit
, is n

h re
terminal first.
hole

spec
– Open battery positive terminal cover.
es, in part or in w

t to the co
– Tighten battery terminal clamp -2- on battery positive terminal
to specified torque ⇒ page 83

rrectness of i
– Close battery positive terminal cover.
l purpos

– Reconnect battery terminal clamp -1- on battery negative ter‐


minal and tighten to specified torque ⇒ page 83 .

nform
ercia

If the battery terminal clamp on negative terminal is not seated


m

at
securely:
om

ion
c

in t
Perform the following jobs:
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
op py
– Tighten battery terminal clamp -1- on battery positive terminal t. C rig
gh ht
to specified torque ⇒ page 83 . yri
p by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

Note

If the battery has been reconnected, observe procedures descri‐


bed in ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 27 .

82 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
n AG. Volkswagen AG do Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
5.4.2 Battery terminal connections tho
ir se tee
or
au ac
ss

ce
e
Caution

nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
To prevent damage to the battery terminal clamps and the bat‐

erm

ab
ility
tery terminals, observe the following:
ot p

wit
, is n
♦ The battery terminal clamps must only be connected by

h re
hole

hand (without using force).

spec
es, in part or in w

♦ Battery terminals must not be greased.

t to the co
♦ Fit battery terminal clamps in such a way that the battery
terminal is flush with the clamp or protrudes from it.

rrectness of i
♦ When connecting the battery, always follow the procedure
l purpos

described in workshop manual ⇒ Rep. gr. 27


♦ After tightening the battery terminal clamps to the prescri‐

nf
ercia

bed torque, they must not be retightened!

orm
m

atio
om

n in
c

For specified torques of battery terminal clamps -1- and additional


or

thi
e

clamps -2-, refer to table “Specified torques: Battery”


t

sd
iva

⇒ page 83 .

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

5.4.3 Specified torques: Battery

Caution

♦ After tightening the battery terminal clamps to the prescri‐


bed torque, they must not be retightened.

Follow notes regarding battery terminal connections ⇒ page 83 .


Threaded connections Specified torques
Battery -A-: Battery terminal clamps on battery terminals M6 6 Nm
Battery -A-: Securing bolt for battery carrier M8x35 23 Nm

5. Descriptions of work 83
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

5.5 Battery: Perform visual check and check


magic eye
Perform the following jobs:
– Visual inspection of battery as well as a battery check using
“magic eye”
♦ Battery: Perform visual check ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr.
27
♦ Battery: Check magic eye ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 27
♦ Battery with black electrolyte level sticker on the battery
⇒ page 84

5.5.1 Battery with black electrolyte level stick‐


er on the battery

WARNING

Risk of injury! Take note of the warnings and comply with the
safety regulations ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 27 ; Warnings
and safety regulations .

olkswagen AG
en AG. V
The magic eye provides informationolconcerning
ksw
ag the electrolyte
does
not
level of battery. ed
byV gu
ara
is nte
or
– Lightly tap the magic eye
au with the handle of a screwdriver.
th eo
ra
ss c
ce
e
nl

pt
du

Note
an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility

The air bubbles in the battery rise. In this way, falsification of the
ot p

level indicated by the magic eye is avoided.


wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec

2 different display colours are possible:


es, in part or in w

t to the co

Electrolyte level indication


Electrolyte level indication: Electrolyte level in batter ok
rrectness of i

black
Electrolyte level indication: col‐ Electrolyte level too low The
l purpos

ourless or light yellow battery must be replaced


nform
ercia

WARNING
m

at
om

ion
c

It is not permissible to test or charge batteries whose magic


in t
or

his

eye is colourless or light yellow. Jump starting is not permissi‐


ate

do
riv

ble either!
p

cum
for

If the battery is tested or charged or if jump starting is carried


en
ng

t.
yi Co
out, there is a danger of explosion. . Cop py
rig
ht ht
These batteries must be replaced.
rig by
copy Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5.6 Removing relay for battery disconnec‐


tion (if fitted)
On vehicles with transport equipment, a battery cut-off relay is
fitted on the battery positive terminal in left engine compartment.

84 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

On RHD vehicles an additional adapter cable is installed to extend


the electrical wiring harness of the battery cut-off relay to connect
the brake fluid reservoir in right engine compartment.
The battery cut-off relay protects the battery from discharging by
electrical consumers not required during transportation from man‐
ufacturer to dealer.
♦ The battery cut-off relay and the adapter cable for RHD vehi‐
cles must be removed for delivery inspection, if still fitted. AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
Notes on invoicing d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
For removing the battery cut-off relay and/or the RHDauadapter
t ra
c
cable 20 time units are credited. ss

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
Note

rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
♦ The battery terminal clamps must only be connected by hand
, is n

h re
without using force, to ensure the battery housing is not dam‐
hole

spec
aged.
es, in part or in w

t to the co
♦ Battery terminals must not be greased.
♦ Disconnecting the battery earth cable ensures safe working
on the electrical system.

rrectness of i
l purpos

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Torque wrench -V.A.G 1331- (5-50 Nm)

nform
mercia

a
com

tion in
r
te o

thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

Procedure for all vehicles


Perform the following jobs:
– Switch off ignition and all electrical consumers.
– Disconnect battery terminal clamp -1- on battery negative ter‐
minal first.
– Separate connector -1- between vehicle side cable and elec‐
trical wiring harness to battery cut-off relay.

5. Descriptions of work 85
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
ise nte
Amarok 2011 ➤ thor eo
u ra
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012 ss a c

ce
le
un

pt
– Separate connector -2- of electrical wiring harness for battery

an
d
itte

y li
cut-off relay from brake fluid reservoir.

rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
ercia

– Secure vehicle side cable -1- back on brake fluid reservoir


connection.
m

a
com

tion in
r
te o

thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

– Unscrew securing bolt (10 mm) -1- of battery cut-off relay from
jump start point for battery positive terminal and remove.

– Loosen hexagon flange nut (10 mm) -1- from battery cut-off
relay and remove cable to main fuse box -2- from connection.
Procedure for RHD vehicles
On RHD vehicles an additional adapter cable is installed to extend
the electrical wiring harness of the battery cut-off relay to connect
the brake fluid reservoir on the right in engine compartment.
Perform the following jobs:
– Open cable tie -1- on centre of bulkhead and remove electrical
wiring harness of battery cut-off relay -2- with adapter cable
-3- from cable tie.

86 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Remove cable tie by unscrewing it from stud.


Procedure for all vehicles
Perform the following jobs:
– Remove battery cut-off relay with electrical wiring harness
and, if necessary, adapter cable for RHD.

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
– Unscrew jump start point (17 mm) -1- from battery
ss positive c
terminal and remove.

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
– Route cable to main fuse box -2- to battery positive terminal. itte

y li
erm

ab
– Place the cable in the envisaged position -arrow- in the termi‐

ility
ot p

nal protector on the battery positive terminal.

wit
, is n

h re
hole

– Now secure cable to main fuse box -2- with jump start point

spec
-1- to battery positive terminal.
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

Specified torque: 8 ± 1 Nm

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

– Remove red terminal cap -1- from ashtray and insert it into
thread of jump start point -2-.
– Reconnect battery terminal clamp to battery negative terminal.
– Tighten securing bolt of terminal clamp to specified torque
⇒ page 83 .
– Install battery cover.

Note

If the battery has been reconnected, observe procedures descri‐


bed in ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr. 27 .

5. Descriptions of work 87
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

5.7 Front passenger front airbag: Check key


switch and “On/Off function”

Note

If the airbag is deactivated, the front airbag, side airbag and cur‐
tain airbag are deactivated on the front passenger side. All other
airbags in the vehicle remain functional.

WARNING

It is only permissible to deactivate the front passenger airbags


if, in exceptional cases, a child's seat has to be used on the
front passenger seat
with the child sitting facing backwards.

Note

The “PASSENGER AIRBAG ON/OFF” switch is located on the


right end of dash panel.

Perform the following jobs:


– Check “ON/OFF function” of key switch as follows:
Deactivating front passenger airbags (deactivated)
– Switch off ignition.
– Using the ignition key, turn key switch
gen AG
. to
Volposition
kswagen A-1-
G do“PAS‐
SENGER AIRBAG OFF”. Volkswa es n
ot
y gu
db ara
The key slot must pointorin
ise the direction of travel (forwards). nte
th eo
s au ra
c
s
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i

If ignition is switched on, warning lamp in dash panel “PASSEN‐


l purpos

GER AIRBAG OFF” -arrow- must light up continuously.


– Switch off ignition.
nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

88 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
wage
5.8 Checking tyres: Condition, wear pattern, lks es n
o ot g
byV ua
tyre pressure, tread depth
d ran
ir se tee
tho
u or
a ac
ss

ce
le
un
Note

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
♦ The following descriptions of work also apply to the spare

ility
ot p
wheel, if a spare wheel with standard tyres is fitted.

wit
is n

h re
♦ For safety reasons, only tyres of same type and tread pattern ole,

spec
should be fitted on a vehicle!
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
♦ Check tyre age ⇒ page 89
♦ Tyre pressures (including spare wheel): Check, correct if nec‐

rrectne
essary ⇒ page 91
♦ Checking wear pattern ⇒ page 90

ss o
cial p

f
♦ Tyre tread depth (including spare wheel): Check and enter

inform
⇒ page 90
mer

atio
♦ Check condition ⇒ page 89
om

n
c

i
or

n
5.8.1 Check tyre age

thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

Note
t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh
We recommend that summer or winter tyres older than 6 years
ht
pyri by
Vo
o
should be taken out of service.
c by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

Note

The DOT number -arrow- is a number sequence stamped on at


least one side of the tyre wall on motor vehicles which indicates
the production date of the tyre.

The first two digits are for the calendar week (KW); shown as “02”
in this example.
The last two digits indicate the year of manufacture; shown as
“04” in this example.
In this case, therefore, “0204” means that the tyre was produced
in the second week of 2004.

5.8.2 Checking condition of tyre


Tests at delivery inspection
Perform the following jobs:
– Check following areas of tyre for damage:
♦ »Tyre treads«
♦ »Tyre side walls«

5. Descriptions of work 89
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note
G. Volkswagen
If damage is determined, always check to
lkssee
wageif a new tyre should
nA AG do
es n
be fitted. db
yV
o ot g
ua
r e an
ris tee
tho or
Tests at interval service au ac
ss

ce
e

Perform the following jobs:


nl

pt
du

an
itte

– Check following areas of tyre for damage:

y li
erm

ab
ility
♦ »Tyre treads«
ot p

wit
, is n

♦ »Tyre side walls«

h re
hole

spec
– Remove foreign bodies from tyres such as nails and glass
es, in part or in w

splinters if necessary.

t to the co
– In addition, check the tyres for:

rrectness of i
♦ »Cupping«
l purpos

♦ »One-sided tread wear«


♦ »Porous side walls«

nform
ercia

♦ »Cuts«
m

at
om

i
♦ »Punctures«

on
c

in t
or

♦ »Tyre age« “DOT identification” 1.)

his
ate

do
priv

c
1.)
Tyres that are more than 6 years old should be renewed (rec‐
um
for

en
g

ommendation to customer)
n

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
yri by
Note cop Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
The customer must be informed of any faults found.

5.8.3 Checking wear pattern


The wear pattern on the front tyres will indicate, for example, if
toe and camber settings should be checked:
♦ Feathering on tread indicates incorrect toe setting.
♦ One-sided tread wear is mainly attributed to incorrect toe and
camber.
If wear of this nature is detected, determine cause by checking
alignment (repair measure).

5.8.4 Tyre tread depth (including spare


wheel): Check and enter
Perform the following jobs:
– Check tyre tread depth.
Minimum tread depth: 1.6 mm

WARNING

The minimum tread depth may vary according to legislation in


individual countries.

90 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note

♦ The minimum tread depth is reached when the tyres have


worn down level with the 1.6 mm high tread wear indicators
-arrows- positioned at intervals around the tyre.
♦ If the tread depth is approaching the minimum allowed depth,
inform the customer.

5.8.5 Tyre pressure (including spare wheel):


Check using tyre inflator -VAS 5216- ,
correct tyre pressure if necessary
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Tyre inflator -VAS 5216-

n AG. Volkswagen AG do
wage es n
Note yV
olks ot g
ua
d b ran
ir se tee
♦ “Checking tyre inflation pressure” u also applies to the spare
tho
or
a ac
wheel, if a spare wheel with standard
ss tyres is fitted.
ce
le
un

♦ The pressures in the table apply to cold tyres. Do not reduce


pt
an
d
itte

increased pressures of warm tyres.


y li
rm

ab
pe

♦ Winter tyres and summer tyres may be used with the same
ility
ot

tyre sizes - check suitability for use with chains.


wit
, is n

h re
hole

♦ Tyre pressures for the relevant model can also be found on a


spec

sticker attached to the inside of fuel tank flap.


es, in part or in w

t to the co

♦ Values for pressure are indicated in “bar”.


♦ Adjust the tyre pressure to suit the vehicle load.
rrectness of i

♦ Tyre pressures apply for all tyre sizes fitted in the factory.
l purpos

♦ The tyre pressures indicated are valid when towing a trailer up


to a speed of 130 km/h (if permitted).
nform
mercia

Explanation for speed indexes used in the table:


a
com

tion in

♦ Q: up to 160 km/h
r
te o

thi
s
iva

♦ R: up to 170 km/h
do
r
rp

cum
fo

♦ S: up to 180 km/h
en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
♦ T: up to 190 km/h C py
t. rig
gh ht
yri by
♦ H: up to 210 km/h cop Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5. Descriptions of work 91
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

♦ V: up to 240 km/h
Tyre pressure table:
Applies to all factory-fitted tyre sizes.
Permitted axle load Type of tyre Half payload Full payload
Full load: FA / RA
(kg)
front rear front rear
1370 / 1860 ♦ 205 R16 C 110/108 T 2.5 2.5 2.8 4.5

♦ 245/70 R16 111 T 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0

♦ 245/65 R17 111 H 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0

♦ 255/60 R18 112 H 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0

♦ 255/55 R19 111 H 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0

1420 / 1860 ♦ 205 R16 C 110/108 T 2.7 2.7 3.0 4.5

♦ 245/70 R16 111 T 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0


AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
olksw ♦ 245/65 R17 111 oes
noHt 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0
byV gu
ara
ed
is nte
ut
hor
♦ 255/60 R18 112 H eo 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0
a ra
ss c
♦ 255/55 R19 111 H 2.0 2.0 2.0 3.0
ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li

Spare wheel with standard tyres


rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

The spare wheel should have the highest tyre pressure deter‐
wit
, is n

mined for the vehicle.


h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co

5.9 Brake system: Perform visual check for


leaks and damage
rrectness of i

– Check following components for leaks and damage:


l purpos

♦ Brake servo,
nform
ercia

♦ for anti-lock brake system: hydraulic unit,


m

♦ Brake calipers,
com

tion in
r

♦ Brake master cylinder.


te o

thi
s
iva

do

Perform the following jobs:


r
rp

cum
fo

– Make sure that brake hoses are not twisted ⇒ Brake hydraulic
en
ng

t.
yi Co
system, regulator, booster; Rep. gr. 47 . . Cop py
rig
ht ht
– In addition, make sure that brake hoses do not contact other
rig by
opy Vo
components across entire steering range.
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
– Check brake hoses for porosity or brittleness.
– Check brake hoses and lines for chafing.
– Check brake connections and fastenings for correct seating,
leaks and corrosion.

92 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

WARNING

Faults found must always be rectified (repair measure).

5.10 Thicknessswofagebraken AG. Volkpads and


swagen AG do condition
es n
of front ybrake discs and rear drum uabrake
olk ot g
V
d b ran
ir se
linings:
utho check tee
or
sa ac
Front disc brake
s
pads: Check thickness ⇒ page 93

ce
le
un

pt
Rear drum brake pads: Check thickness ⇒ page 94

an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
Condition of brake discs: Check ⇒ page 94

ility
ot p

wit
Special tools and workshop equipment required
is n

h re
ole,

♦ Torque wrench -V.A.G 1332-

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
rrectness o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

♦ Electric hand torch and mirror


um
r
fo

en
ng

t.
♦ Fluorescent lamp, 13 watts -VAS 6485-
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
The adapter for loosening and tightening anti-theft wheel bolts is
gh ht
pyri by
in the vehicle tool kit ⇒ page 130
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

Note

A suitable adapter for loosening and tightening anti-theft wheel


bolts is provided in the vehicle tool kit.

5.10.1 Front brake pads


Perform the following jobs:
– Measure outer and inner brake pad thickness by visually
checking through the holes of wheel rim (depending on type).
– If necessary, remove the wheel on the driver's side to make it
easier to assess or measure the remaining thickness of the
pads.
– Mark position of wheel in relation to brake disc, in order to
avoid imbalances on vehicle wheel.
– Unscrew wheel securing bolts and remove wheel.

5. Descriptions of work 93
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Assess or measure inner and outer pad thickness.


a - Pad thickness “without” backplate
Wear limit: 2 mm

WARNING

The brake pads have reached their wear limit at a brake pad
thickness of 2 mm (without backplate) and must be renewed
(repair measure). Inform customer!

Note

♦ When replacing disc brake pads, always check brake discs for
wear! Checking and if necessary replacing the brake discs is
a repair measure.
♦ In the case of defective links, please select the described
working procedure manually in the relevant information mate‐
rial.

Check brake disc for wear.


Working procedure; Running gear ► Brake system ► ⇒ Rep. gr.
46 Brake mechanism ► Repairing front wheel brake.
– If necessary, secure wheel in marked position.
– Tighten wheel securing bolts in criss-cross fashion to following
specified torque: specified torque 180 Nm
– Push on wheel trims if necessary.

5.10.2 Condition of brakeswdiscs:


agen
AG. VCheck
olkswagen AG
does
k not
Vol gu
Check all brake discs for thesefollowing
db
y
damage pattern: ara
nte
ri
ho eo
♦ Cracks aut ra
c
ss
♦ Scoring
ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

♦ Rust (no surface rust)


y li
erm

ab

♦ Degree of wear at the ridge along the circumference


ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

Note
spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co

Inform customer if brake disc damage is similar to these damage


patterns. Renewing the brake discs is a repair measure.
rrectne

5.10.3 Rear drum brake linings: Check thick‐


s

ness
s o
cial p

f in

Perform the following procedure:


form
mer

atio

– Remove inspection hole cover.


om

n
c

– Check brake lining thickness through inspection holes


or

n thi
e

-arrow- in brake backplates.


t

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

94 5. Descriptions of work
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV Amarok 2011 ua ➤
d ran
ir se
tho Maintenance - Edition 10.2012 tee
or
au ac
ss
Wear limit: 1.5 mm (lining thickness only).

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
rm
WARNING

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n
The brake pads have reached their wear limit at a brake pad

h re
thickness of 2 mm (without backplate) and must be renewed

hole

spec
(repair measure). Inform customer!

es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
Note

l purpos
♦ Check linings for brake fluid or grease contamination.
♦ When replacing drum brake linings, always check brake discs

nform
ercia
for wear! Checking and if necessary replacing the brake discs
m
is a repair measure.

a
com

tion in
♦ In the case of defective links, please select the described
r
te o

thi
working procedure manually in the relevant information mate‐

s
iva

do
rial.
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi
Check brake disc for wear.
Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh
Working procedure; Running gear ► Brake system ► ⇒ Rep. gr.
ht
pyri by
Vo
46 Brake mechanism ► Repairing rear wheel brake.
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

5.11 Brake system and shock absorbers:


Perform visual check for leaks and dam‐
age
Check following components for leaks and damage:
♦ Brake master cylinder
♦ Hydraulic unit
♦ Brake calipers
♦ Shock absorber
♦ Presence of dust caps on brake fluid bleeder valves
– Ensure that brake hoses are not twisted.
– Additionally ensure that brake hoses do not touch any vehicle
components when steering is at full lock.
– Check brake hoses for porosity or brittleness.
– Check brake hoses and lines for chafing.
– Also check brake connections and fastenings for correct seat‐
ing, leaks and corrosion.

WARNING

Faults found must always be rectified (repair measure).

5.12 Brake fluid: Change


♦ Observe brake fluid specification ⇒ page 99

5. Descriptions of work 95
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
agen
AG. Volkswagen AG d
o
w es n
olks ot g
byV ua
ed ran
ris tee
WARNING utho or
a ac
ss
♦ Brake fluid must under no circumstances come into con‐

ce
le
un

pt
tact with fluids containing mineral oils (oil, petrol, cleaning

an
d
itte

y li
solutions). Mineral oils will damage seals and sleeves of
erm

ab
brake system.

ility
ot p

wit
♦ Brake fluid is poisonous. In addition, due to its corrosive
is n

h re
nature, it must not come into contact with paint.
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

♦ Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it attracts moisture from the

t to the co
surrounding air and therefore must always be stored in air-
tight containers.
♦ Wash away spilt brake fluid using plenty of water.

rrectne
♦ Do not reuse extracted (used) brake fluid!

ss
♦ Observe disposal regulations!

o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
Special tools and workshop equipment required
om

n
c

i
or

n
♦ Brake filling and bleeding equipment -VAS 5234-

thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

♦ Brake pedal actuator -V.A.G 1869/2-

♦ Upgrade kit and extraction unit -V.A.G 1869/4-

96 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Perform the following procedure:


– Unscrew sealing cover -1- from brake fluid reservoir -2-.

Note

The strainer in brake fluid reservoir must not be removed.

olkswagen AG
en AG. V
– Extract as much brake fluid as possible using suction
olks
wag hose does
not
from brake filling and bleeding equipment e-VAS
d by V 5234- . gu
ara
ris nte
utho eo
ra
a
WARNING ss c

ce
le
un

pt
Do not reuse extracted (used) brake fluid!

an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
ercia

– Screw adapter -1- onto brake fluid reservoir -2-.


m

a
com

tio
– Fit brake pedal actuator -V.A.G 1869/2- between driver seat
n in
r
te o

and brake pedal and pretension. thi


s
iva

do

– Connect filler hole from brake filling and bleeding equipment -


r
rp

cum
fo

VAS 5234- to adapter.


en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
Note pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.
Observe ⇒ operating instructions for brake filling and bleeding
equipment -VAS 5234- !

WARNING

Use an appropriate bleeder hose. It must seat tightly on bleed‐


er valve so that no air can enter the brake system.

Change brake fluid in clutch slave cylinder.


Bleeder valve for clutch slave cylinder is located on left side of
gearbox.

5. Descriptions of work 97
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Pull cover cap off bleeder valve of clutch slave cylinder


-arrow-.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
swage es n
– Push collector bottle bleeder hose onto bleeder valve yofVoclutch
lk ot g
ua
slave cylinder. ir se
d b ran
tee
th o
or
– Open bleeder valve and allow approx. 0.1 litre au
or 100 cm 3 to ac
ss
flow out.

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
– Close bleeder valve and quickly operate foot pedal 10 to 15

itte

y li
times from stop to stop.

rm

ab
pe

ility
– Open bleeder valve and allow another 0.05 litre or 50 cm3 of
ot

wit
brake fluid to flow out. , is n

h re
hole

spec
– Close bleeder valve and push on cover cap.
es, in part or in w

t to the co
– Press clutch pedal rapidly several times.
– Remove caps from bleed valves of brake calipers.

rrectness of i
Changing brake fluid at rear.
l purpos

– Push collector bottle bleed hose -1- onto rear right bleed valve.

nform
ercia

– Open bleeder valve and let appropriate quantity of brake fluid


run out (see table).
m

a
com

tion in
r
te o

thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

– Close bleeder valve again.


Repeat procedure on rear left of vehicle.
Change brake fluid at front.
– Push collector bottle bleeder hose -1- onto front right-hand
bleeder valve, open bleeder valve and allow appropriate
amount of brake fluid to flow out out (see table).

98 5. Descriptions of work
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Close bleeder valve again.


Repeat procedure on front left of vehicle.

Sequence Recommended quantity of brake fluid to be changed


On clutch slave cylinder 1) approx. 0.15 litre
Rear right approx. 0.25 litre
Rear left approx. 0.25 litre
AG. Volkswagen AG d
Front right lksw
agen oes
not approx. 0.25 litre
o
yV gu
Front left sed b ara
n approx. 0.25 litre
ri tee
ho
aut or
ac
ss
ce
le

1)
un

Only vehicles with manual gearbox pt


an
d
itte

y li
• Brake fluid quantity to be changed: approx. 1.0 to 1.15 litre
rm

ab
pe

(depending on vehicle equipment)


ility
ot

wit
, is n

Final checks
h re
hole

spec

– Fit cover caps on bleeder valves of brake calipers.


es, in part or in w

t to the co

– Set fill lever of brake filling and bleeding equipment -


VAS 5234- to position “B” (see ⇒ operating instructions ).
– Remove filler hose from adapter.
rrectness of i

– Unscrew adapter from brake fluid reservoir.


l purpos

– Check brake fluid level and correct it if necessary.


nform
ercia

– Screw on sealing cover -1- of brake fluid reservoir -2-.


m

a
com

– Remove brake pedal actuator.


ion in
r
te o

– Check pressure and free travel of brake pedal.


thi
s
iva

do

Free play: max. 1/3 of pedal travel.


r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5.12.1 Brake fluid specification


The brake fluids are available as replacement part. The part num‐
ber can be found in ⇒ Electronic parts catalogue “ETKA” .
Permissible brake fluid specifications
♦ Volkswagen recommends using new brake fluid acc. to VW
Standard 501 14 for optimum function of brake system.
♦ Alternatively, a brake fluid acc. to requirements of US standard
FMVSS 116 DOT4 or DIN ISO 4925 Class 4 can be used.

5. Descriptions of work 99
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

♦ Specification is stated on brake fluid packaging.

5.13 Brake fluid level: Check


♦ Checking brake fluid level at delivery inspection ⇒ page 100
♦ Checking brake fluid level at interval service and inspection
service ► 2010 ⇒ page 100
♦ Observe brake fluid specification ⇒ page 99

WARNING
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
♦ Brake fluid must under no circumstances come into con‐ w oes
olks not
yV gu
tact with fluids containing mineral oils (oil, petrol, cleaning sed b ara
nte
solutions). Mineral oils will damage seals and sleeves tof ho
ri eo
brake system. sa
u ra
c
s

ce
le
♦ Brake fluid is poisonous. In addition, due to its corrosive
un

pt
nature, it must not come into contact with paint.

an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
♦ Brake fluid is hygroscopic, i.e. it attracts moisture from the
pe

ility
surrounding air and therefore must always be stored in air-
ot

wit
, is n

tight containers.

h re
hole

spec
♦ Wash away spilt brake fluid using plenty of water.
es, in part or in w

t to the co
♦ Observe disposal regulations!

rrectness of i
5.13.1 Checking brake fluid level at delivery in‐
l purpos

spection
At delivery inspection the fluid level must be at MAX. marking

nform
ercia

-1-.
m

a
com

tion in
r

Note
te o

thi
s
iva

do
r

In order that brake fluid does not overflow the reservoir, MAX
rp

cum
fo

marking -1- must not be exceeded.

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

5.13.2 Checking brake fluid level at interval


service and inspection service

Note

♦ The fluid level must always be judged in conjunction with lin‐


ing/pad wear.
♦ When vehicle is in use, fluid level tends to drop slightly due to
lining/pad wear and automatic adjustment.

100 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Recommended brake fluid level “BEFORE” brake pads are at


wear limit:
• “At MIN marking or just above”, -2-
Then “REPLENISHING IS NOT REQUIRED!”
Recommended brake fluid level, brake pads new or well within
wear limit:
• “Between MIN. and MAX. marking”

WARNING

If fluid level is below MIN marking -2-, the brake system must
be checked before fluid is topped up, “Repair measure”!

5.14 Climatronic: Set temperature to 22 °C

Note

The automatic air conditioning system “Climatronic” only func‐


tions when engine is running and the blower is Vswitched
olkswa
on.
n AG. gen AG
wage does
olks not
Perform the following jobs: by
V gu
ara
ed nte
ris
– Switch on ignition. au
tho eo
ra
ss c
– Check the temperature controllers -2- and -3- to see whether ce
e
nl

the temperature has been set to 22 °C. pt


du

an
itte

y li
If temperature is not set to 22 ℃, then correct it.
erm

ab
ility
ot p

– Press AUTO -1- The “AUTO High” function (high blower output)
wit
, is n

has been activated. The right-hand warning lamp in the button


h re
hole

lights up.
spec
es, in part or in w

– Press AUTO -1- again. The “AUTO Low ” function (low blower
t to the co

output) has been activated. The left-hand warning lamp in the


button lights up.
rrectness of i

– Turn the temperature controllers -2- and -3- to set the desired
temperature for the left-hand and right-hand sides of the inte‐
l purpos

rior.
22 °C is recommended.
nform
mercia

at
om

io

Note
n
c

in t
or

his
ate

In the automatic mode the air temperature, air quantity and air
do
priv

distribution are regulated automatically so that a specified tem‐


um
for

perature level is attained as quickly as possible and is maintained


en
ng

t.
yi
constantly.
Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

5. Descriptions of work 101


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

5.15 Window regulators: Check positioning


(open and close functions)

WARNING
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
wage
After batteries have been disconnected and reconnected yV
olks the es n
ot g
roll-back function of the window regulators is idisabled.
sed
b Severe ua
ran
pinching injuries could result! thor tee
or
au ac
ss

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
Note
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
♦ The automatic opening and closing functions of the electric
, is n

h re
windows do not work after the batteries have been discon‐
hole

nected and reconnected.

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
♦ Therefore, with immediate effect, before a new vehicle is de‐
livered, the window regulators must be reactivated.
♦ Once the windows have been repositioned, the batteries must

rrectness of i
not be disconnected again.
l purpos

Perform the following jobs:

nform
ercia

– Close all doors and windows completely.


m

at
– Insert key in driver's door lock and lock vehicle from outside.
om

ion
c

in t
r

– Unlock vehicle again.


o

his
ate

do
riv

– Lock vehicle again from outside and hold key in lock position
p

cum
or

for at least 1 second.


f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
The one-touch opening and closing function is now ready for use. t. Cop py
rig
gh ht
yri
5.16 Vehicle diagnosis tester
p by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
♦ Connect vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -
VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service information
system -VAS 5052 A- and select functions ⇒ page 102

5.16.1 Connect vehicle diagnostic, testing and


information system -VAS 5051B- or ve‐
hicle diagnostic and service information
system -VAS 5052 A- and select func‐
tions
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -VAS
5051B- or subsequent units

♦ Diagnosis cable 5m -VAS 5051B/1-

102 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Or
♦ Diagnosis cable -VAS 5051/5A-
Or
♦ Vehicle diagnostic and service information system -VAS 5052
A-
♦ Diagnosis cable, 2 m -VAS 5052/3 A-
Or
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
♦ Diagnosis cable, 5 m -VAS 5052/3 A-1- lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
ir se tee
tho
or
Note ss
au ac

ce
e
nl

pt
♦ Observe current operating instructions for vehicle diagnostic,
du

an
itte

testing and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diag‐

y li
erm

ab
nostic and service information system -VAS 5052 A- , which

ility
ot p

are shown on display after selecting the functions Adminis-

wit
, is n

tration and Operating manual .

h re
hole

spec
♦ For diagnosis only use the diagnosis cable indicated above,
es, in part or in w

because this is fitted with CAN bus cables and allows a CAN

t to the co
diagnosis or CAN communication.
♦ For a road test use diagnostic cable -VAS 5051/5A- , to guar‐

rrectness of i
antee the voltage supply of the vehicle diagnostic, testing and
information system -VAS 5051B- .
l purpos

nf
ercia

WARNING

orm
m

atio
m

♦ If the vehicle diagnosis tester is placed within the range of


o

n in
c

action of an airbag during a test or measuring run,


or

thi
te

sd
a

♦ there is a risk of severe or fatal injury should an airbag be


iv

o
r
rp

cu
triggered!
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi
♦ During the road test, take another person with you who
Co
op py
can operate the vehicle diagnosis tester from the rear t. C rig
gh ht
seat. pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
♦ Always secure testing and measuring equipment on the Prote AG.
rear seat during a road test.

Perform the following jobs:

5. Descriptions of work 103


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Connect diagnosis cable connector to diagnosis connection


with ignition switched off.
– Switch on tester.
– Switch on ignition.
– Touch the field on the screen for Guided fault finding or
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
Guided functions . wage es n
olks o V t gu
by ara
– Select one after another:
or
ise
d
nte
th eo
♦ Brand au ra
c
ss

ce
le

♦ Type
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
♦ Model year
rm

ab
pe

ility
♦ Version
ot

wit
, is n

h re
♦ Engine code
hole

spec
– Confirm entered data.
es, in part or in w

t to the co
Note

rrectness of i
Wait until tester has read all control units in vehicle.
l purpos

– Press GoTo button and select Function/component selec-

nform
ercia

tion function.
m

a
com

Now follow screen display to start desired functions.


tion in
r
te o

thi

5.17 Performing vehicle system test


s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

– Connect vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -


en
ng

t.
yi
VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service information
Co
op py
system -VAS 5052 A- ⇒ page 102 .
. C rig
ht ht
rig by
copy Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote
Note
AG.

Observe current operating instructions for vehicle diagnostic,


testing and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic
and service information system -VAS 5052 A- , which are shown
on display after selecting the functions Administration and
Operating manual .

WARNING

♦ If the vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -


VAS 5051B- or the vehicle diagnostic and service infor‐
mation system -VAS 5052 A- is placed in the range of
action of an airbag during a test or measuring run,
♦ there is a risk of severe or fatal injury should an airbag be
triggered!
♦ During the road test take another person with you who can
operate the vehicle diagnostic, testing and information
system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service in‐
formation system -VAS 5052 A- from the rear seat.
♦ Always secure testing and measuring equipment on the
rear seat during a road test.

104 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
wage
If faults are stored, the respective event memory mustynot Vo be
lks es n
ot g
cleared. ir se
d b ua
ran
o tee
th or
au ac
Reason: ss

ce
le
un

pt
If the subsequent fault finding (repair measure) is performed using

an
d
itte
vehicle diagnosis, testing and information system -VAS 5051B-

y li
rm

ab
or vehicle diagnosis and service information system -VAS 5052

pe

ility
A- in operating mode Guided fault finding , the device reads

ot

wit
, is n
the event memories again. The vehicle diagnosis, testing and in‐

h re
formation system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnosis, testing and
hole

spec
information system -VAS 5052 A- can generate a test plan for
es, in part or in w

“Guided fault finding” but only if the faults are still stored in the

t to the co
event memory.
Perform the following jobs:

rrectness of i
– Pull on handbrake.
l purpos

– Manual gearbox: Gear lever in neutral

nform
– Switch on ignition.
mercia

– Select Guided functions operating mode -arrow- on display

a
com

tio
of vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -VAS

n in
r

5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service information system


te o

thi
-VAS 5052 A- .

s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
Indicated on display:
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
– Then perform vehicle identification on vehicle diagnostic, test‐ Cop py
ing and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic
t. rig
gh ht
yri by
and service information system -VAS 5052 A- . cop Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote
– Select one after another:
AG.

♦ Brand
♦ Type
♦ Model year
♦ Version
♦ Engine code
– Confirm vehicle identification
– If the vehicle identification has been performed correctly, con‐
firm with > button.

5. Descriptions of work 105


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
AG. Volkswagen AG d
Indicated on display: ksw
agen oes
not
Vol
y gu
– Select Vehicle system test function ise
d-arrow- on display of
b ara
nte
r
vehicle diagnostic, testing and information
utho system -VAS eo
ra
5051B- or vehicle diagnostic andssservice
a information system c
-VAS 5052 A- .

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
– Start system test by selecting function Start system test

itte

y li
rm
on display of vehicle diagnosis, testing and information system

ab
pe

ility
-VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnosis and service information
ot

wit
system -VAS 5052 A- .
, is n

h re
hole

Now the event memories of all control units for this type of vehicle

spec
are automatically read and any faults stored will be listed.
es, in part or in w

t to the co
Note

rrectness of i
♦ If any stored faults are listed, it is useful at this point to change
l purpos

to the Guided troubleshooting mode


♦ in order to continue working with the vehicle diagnostic, testing

nform
ercia

and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic


m

and service information system -VAS 5052 A- and avoid the

a
com

tio
tester having to perform a second vehicle identification check.

n in
r
te o

thi
♦ When the system test indicates the need for a repair measure

s
iva

do
(fault finding) and this is to be performed immediately, change
r
rp

cum
to operating mode Guided fault finding .
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
♦ If the repair measure is to be carried out at a later date, e.g. Cop py
t. rig
after completing servicing, end operating mode Guided gh ht
yri by
functions . The event memory will not be cleared.
cop Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
♦ Follow the instructions of the vehicle diagnosis, testing and
information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnosis and
service information system -VAS 5052 A- on how to proceed
for “Guided find finding” or “Guided functions”.

– End the system test via function GoTo and End or continue
“Guided fault finding” after changing the operating mode.

Caution

The vehicle must always be delivered to the customer with


event memory cleared.

Static faults
If one or more static faults have been stored in the event memory,
it is advisable to rectify these faults with the help of “Guided trou‐
bleshooting” in consultation with the customer.
Sporadic faults
If only sporadic faults or notes have been stored in the event
memory
and the customer makes no complaints regarding an electronic
vehicle system, the event memory is to be erased.
Clear event memory.
– Start operating mode Vehicle self-diagnosis in system
start screen of vehicle diagnosis, testing and information sys‐
tem -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnosis and service information
system -VAS 5052 A- .

106 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

There are two ways to clear the event memory:


♦ Clearing event memory by selecting individual control units:
Perform the following jobs:
– Select control unit in question individually in overview, select
Read event memory and then press Delete event memo-
ry .

♦ Clearing event memory via function Collection services :


Perform the following jobs:
– Call up Collection services on display,
– and then select Delete event memory function.

Note

♦ If all faults have been cleared, it is shown on display.


♦ The diagnosis log can be sent automatically »online«.

The vehicle system test is completed.

5.18 Four-wheel drive: Insert fuse


Insert fuse 46 on fuse holder C -SC46- “4 x 4” four-wheel drive
control unit
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -VAS
5051B- or subsequent units
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
byV gu
ara
ed
ris nte
ho eo
aut ra
ss c
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

♦ Diagnosis cable 5m -VAS 5051B/1-


t to the co

Or
♦ Diagnosis cable -VAS 5051/5A-
rrectness of i

Or
l purpos

♦ Vehicle diagnostic and service information system -VAS 5052


A-
nform
ercia

♦ Diagnosis cable, 2 m -VAS 5052/3 A-


m

at
om

ion
c

Or
in t
or

his
ate

♦ Diagnosis cable, 5 m -VAS 5052/3 A-1-


do
priv

cum
or

Perform the following jobs:


f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
– Switch off ignition, all electrical consumers and withdraw igni‐ C py
ht. rig
tion key. rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5. Descriptions of work 107


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Release fuse holder C -SC- -1- -arrows- and fold down fuse
holder C -SC- .

– Remove “SC fuse / 25 A” -arrow-, which is attached to dash


panel insert -K- .

– Place fuse 46 on fuse holder C -SC46- in fuse holder C -SC-


-1- -arrow-, using removed insertion aid if necessary. . Volkswag AG en AG
agen does
– Replace insertion aid where it belongs if it has been
yV
olkremoved.
sw not
gu
b ara
ed
– Fold up fuse holder C -SC- and lock in place.
ho
ris nte
eo
t
au ra
c
ss
ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

– Switch on ignition and check if both warning lamps “4 x 4 high /


t to the co

4 x 4 low” -arrow- in dash panel insert -K- no longer light up.


– Switch off ignition.
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

a
com

tion in
r
te o

thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

108 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Connect vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -


VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service information
system -VAS 5052 A- ⇒ page 102 .

Note

♦ Observe current operating instructions for vehicle diagnostic,


G. Volkswage
testing and information system -VAS ksw
5051B-
agen
A
or vehiclen Adiag‐
G do
es n
nostic and service information system
by Vol
-VAS 5052 A- , which ot g
ua
are shown on display after oselecting
rised
the functions Adminis- ran
tee
tration and Operating au manual .
th or
a
ss c
♦ For diagnosis only use the diagnosis cable indicated above,

ce
le
un

pt
because this is fitted with CAN bus cables and allows a CAN

an
d
itte

diagnosis or CAN communication.

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

WARNING

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

♦ If the vehicle diagnosis tester is placed within the range of

t to the co
action of an airbag during a test or measuring run,
♦ there is a risk of severe or fatal injury should an airbag be
triggered!

rrectness of i
♦ During the road test, take another person with you who
l purpos

can operate the vehicle diagnosis tester from the rear


seat.

nform
ercia

♦ Always secure testing and measuring equipment on the


m

a
rear seat during a road test.
com

tion in
r
te o

thi
s
iva

– Switch on ignition. do
r
rp

cum
fo

– Connect vehicle diagnosis, testing and information system -


en
ng

t.
yi
VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnosis and service information
Co
op py
system -VAS 5052 A- .
t. C rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
– Start operating mode Vehicle self-diagnosis in system
co lksw
by
cted agen
start screen of vehicle diagnosis, testing and information sys‐ Prote AG.

tem -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnosis and service information


system -VAS 5052 A- .
– Select respective control unit “03 - Brake electronics”, “17 -
Dash panel insert” and “19 - Gateway / data bus” individually
in the overview.
– Select Read event memory function and then Erase event
memory .

Note

If all faults have been cleared, it is shown on display.

The vehicle system test is completed.


– Switch off ignition and disconnect vehicle diagnosis, testing
and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnosis and
service information system -VAS 5052 A- .
– Remove vehicle diagnosis, testing and information system -
VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnosis and service information
system -VAS 5052 A- from vehicle.

5. Descriptions of work 109


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

5.19 Protective bellows: Visual check


Perform the following jobs:
– Check outer and inner CV joint boots -arrows- for leaks and
damage.

Note

♦ Carry out a “firm seating” visual inspection of the rear prop‐


shaft or centre mounting (white cap).
♦ Carry out a “leakage” visual inspection of the front propshaft
bellows.

n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
yV
5.20 Dust and pollen filter: Clean housing and ir se
d b ua
ran
tee
renew filter element tho
u or
a ac
ss

ce
le
un

pt
an
d

Note
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
Before installing the new filter, clean area around the dust and
ot

wit
pollen filter in the heater and air conditioner unit.
, is n

h re
hole

spec
Removing
es, in part or in w

t to the co
The filter is located in front passenger footwell.
Perform the following jobs:

rrectness of i
– Unscrew bolts -1- and open cover -2- downwards.
l purpos

nform
mercia

a
com

tion in
r
te o

thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
– Remove filter element -1- downwards. Prote AG.

Note

Observe disposal regulations!

Installing
Perform the following jobs:

Note

Note installation position.

110 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Observe installation position of filter element -arrows-.

– Insert new filter -1-.

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
aut ra
ss c
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

– Close cover -2- and bolt on with bolts -1-.


wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

5.21 Poly V-belt: Check condition


in t
or

his
ate

do
riv

Perform the following jobs:


p

cum
for

en
g

– Use a socket spanner to turn the engine at the vibration damp‐


n

t.
yi Co
er/pulley. t. Cop py
rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5. Descriptions of work 111


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Check poly V-belt -1- for:


♦ Substructure cracks (cracks, core ruptures, cross sectional
breaks)
♦ Layer separation (top layer, cord strands)
♦ Base break-up
♦ Fraying of cord strands
♦ Flank wear (material wear, frayed flanks, brittle flanks -glassy
flanks-, surface cracks)
♦ Traces of oil and grease
♦ Effect of foreign bodies
♦ Blue coloration due to heat (danger of slipping)
If the visual check shows that something is wrong and the poly V-
belt has to be removed, please check the following components:
♦ Examine the poly V-belt for the effect of foreign bodies.
♦ Bearing damage (turn by hand and examine for noises and
smooth running).
♦ Functional test of the alternator's free wheeling pulley.
♦ Check poly V-belt tensioner for axial displacement.

Caution n AG. Volkswagen AG do


lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
ed ran
♦ If faults are found it is absolutely necessary to renew the hor is tee
poly V-belt. aut or
ac
ss
♦ Failures or functional impairments can be avoided if this

ce
le
un

pt
is done.

an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
♦ Renewing the poly V-belt is a repair measure.
pe

ility
ot

♦ Defective components are to be replaced - the tensioner

wit
, is n

h re
must be replaced in any case.
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
5.22 Poly V-belt: Renew

rrectness of i
– The procedure is described in workshop manual ⇒ Rep. gr.
13 .
l purpos

Caution nform
mercia

♦ Renewing the poly V-belt is a repair measure.


a
com

tion in

♦ Defective components are to be replaced - the tensioner


r
te o

thi

must be replaced in any case!


s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

112 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

5.23 Fuel filter: Renew (diesel engine)

Caution

The fuel system must also be vented after replacement of the


common rail high-pressure pump and all components that are
upstream of the common rail high-pressure pump in the low-
pressure fuel system.
For example, fuel filter, fuel lines etc.
The electric fuel pump must be activated once for at least 60
seconds when components that are upstream from the com‐
mon rail high-pressure pump are replaced.
When the common rail high-pressure pump itself is replaced,
the electric fuel pump should be activated for approx. 180 sec‐
onds.
(to be done several times according to need).

Fuel system: Bleed (diesel engine) ⇒ page 114 .


Removing
Perform the following jobs:
n AG. Volkswagen AG
Fuel filter is located wage
olks on inside of left longitudinal
does
not member under
vehicle in area d b ahead of pedal floor.
y V gu
ara
e nte
ris
– To pullut off lines -1- press release buttons on connecting
ho e o pieces
ra
s a filter -2-.
of sfuel c
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i

– To remove fuel filter -1-, press fuel filter from below


l purpos

-movement arrow- upwards out of holder -2- and remove it


downwards.
nf
ercia

Installing
rm
m

atio
m

Perform the following jobs:


o

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r

Note
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi
♦ Note installation position of fuel filter!
Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh
♦ Note fuel line identification on fuel filter!
ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted
♦ Observe disposal regulations!
agen
Prote AG.

– Insert new fuel filter into bracket.

5. Descriptions of work 113


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Push fuel lines -1- onto fuel filter connection. When doing this
ensure that fuel lines are seated securely on fuel filter. AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
lksw not
– Fuel system: Bleed (diesel engine) ⇒ page 114 . d by Vo gu
ara
rise nte
– Start engine and conduct a visual check of fuel system
utho on fuel eo
ra
filter. ss a c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte
Note

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot
To ensure the engine starts immediately after changing the fuel

wit
, is n
filter, bleed the fuel system using vehicle diagnostic, testing and

h re
information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and serv‐ hole

spec
ice information system -VAS 5052 A- ⇒ page 114 .
es, in part or in w

t to the co
5.24 Fuel system: Bleed (diesel engine)

rrectness of i
Using vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -VAS
l purpos

5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service information system -


VAS 5052 A-

nform
ercia

To ensure the engine starts immediately after changing the fuel


filter, bleed the fuel system using vehicle diagnostic, testing and
m

a
com

ti
information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and serv‐

on in
ice information system -VAS 5052 A- .
r
te o

thi
s
iva

Perform the following jobs:

do
r
rp

cum
fo

– Connect vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -

en
ng

t.
yi
VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service information
Co
op py
system -VAS 5052 A- with ignition switched off ⇒ page 102 .
t. C rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
– Switch on ignition.
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.
– Press the Guided functions button on the display.
– Then perform vehicle identification.
– Select following functions one after another:
♦ “Systems capable of self-diagnosis”
♦ “Diesel direct injection and glow plug system”
♦ “Functions”
♦ “Bleeding fuel system”
– Follow instructions on display of vehicle diagnostic, testing
and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic
and service information system -VAS 5052 A- .
– After bleeding fuel system, exit “Guided functions” using Go-
To button.

– Touch function End on display.


– Select function End in “End menu”.
– Switch off ignition.
– Disconnect diagnosis connector from vehicle.
Bleeding the fuel system is finished.

5.25 Fuel filter: Drain water (diesel engine)


Perform the following jobs:
– Unscrew drain plug from bottom end of filter and collect ap‐
prox. 100 ml of fuel into a suitable container.

114 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Screw drain plug back in, if necessary first fitting it with a new
seal if the old one was damaged.

Note

Observe disposal regulations!

5.26 Cooling system: Check frost protection


and coolant level

Caution

Only distilled water may be used for mixing coolant additives.


The use of distilled water enables the optimal level of corrosion
protection to be reached.

Note

♦ From model year 2008 all engines are filled with coolant ad‐
ditive G 12 Plus Plus (purple). G 12 Plus Plus can be enmixed
AG. Volkswagen AG d
with coolant additives G 11 (green), G 12 (red) Voland
kswagG 12 Plus oes
not
(purple)! But because of its positive characteristics,
ed by ensure gu
ara
that only G 12 Plus is used when replenishing.
thoris nte
e or
au ac
♦ G 12 Plus Plus is suitable as a filled-for-life
ss filling for cast iron
and all-aluminium engines and gives optimum protection

ce
le
un

pt
against frost, corrosion damage, scaling and overheating.

an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
♦ G 12 Plus Plus raises the boiling point and ensures better heat
pe

ility
dissipation.
ot

wit
, is n

h re
♦ The coolant concentration must be at least 40 % (frost pro‐
hole

tection to -25 °C) and should never exceed 60 % (frost pro‐

spec
tection to -40 °C). Otherwise both frost protection and cooling
es, in part or in w

t to the co
efficiency will be reduced.
♦ Frost protection must be assured to about -25 °C (in arctic
climatic countries to about -35 °C). rrectness of i
l purpos

♦ Check frost protection, if necessary replenish coolant additive


⇒ page 115
nform
ercia

♦ Check coolant level, replenish coolant if necessary


m

⇒ page 117
a
com

tion in

♦ Mixture ratio ⇒ page 118


r
te o

thi
s
iva

♦ Mixing coolants ⇒ page 117


do
r
rp

cum
fo

5.26.1 Checking frost protection, if necessary


en
ng

t.
yi Co
replenish coolant additive Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
yri by
Special tools and workshop equipment required cop Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5. Descriptions of work 115


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

♦ Refractometer -T10007-

Note

Read precise value for the following tests at bright/dark boundary.


Using a pipette, place a drop of water on the glass to improve the
readability of the bright/dark boundary. The bright/dark boundary
can be clearly recognised on the “WATERLINE”.

Perform the following jobs:


n AG. Volkswagen AG do
wage es n
– Check concentration of coolant additive using refractometer - y Vo lks ot g
T10007- (note). ir se
d b ua
ran
o tee
h
The scale -1- of the refractometer is calibrated for coolant au addi‐
t or
ac
tives G 11, G 12; G 12 Plus and G 12 Plus Plus. ss

ce
le
un

pt
The scale -2- is only calibrated for coolant additive G 13 (initially

an
d
itte

y li
L80).
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

Note

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

♦ Frost protection must be assured to about -25 °C (in arctic

t to the co
climatic countries to about -35 °C).
♦ If a stronger form of frost protection is required for climatic
reasons, the percentage of G 12 Plus Plus can be increased.

rrectne
♦ But only up to 60 % (frost protection down to about -40 °C), as

s
otherwise frost protection will be reduced again and cooling

s o
effectiveness is also reduced.
cial p

f inform
mer

– If frost protection is insufficient, drain required quantity shown


atio
m

in frost protection table and add coolant additive G 12 Plus


o

n
c

Plus.
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

Note
en
ng

t.
yi Co
op py
Observe disposal regulations!
t. C rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.
Frost protection to °C Quantity to drain (in litres)
Actual value Specified value 4-cylinder diesel engine
0 -25 3.5
-35 4.5
-5 -25 3.0
-35 4.0
-10 -25 2.5
-35 3.5

116 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Frost protection to °C Quantity to drain (in litres)


-15 -25 2.0
-35 2.5
-20 -25 1.5
-35 2.5
-25 -35 2.0
-30 -35 1.0
-35 -40 1.0

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
ksw
– Check coolant additive concentration after road test again.by V ol not
gu
ara
ed
is nte
5.26.2 Mixing coolants or eo
h
aut ra
ss c
Refer to the table to glean which coolants can be mixed and which

ce
e
nl

pt
coolant can be added to the standard filling. du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

Note

wit
, is n

h re
hole

Use distilled water to mix the coolant.

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
Initial filling / standard filling
Can be G11 G12 G12+ G12++

rrectness of i
mixed from 1994 from 1996 from 2000 from 2005
with …
l purpos

G11 X 0 0 0
G12 0 X 0 0

nf
ercia

orm
G12+ X 1.) X X 0
m

atio
om

G12++ X 1.) X X X

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
a

Key
iv

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
♦ “X” May be mixed
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
♦ “0” May NOT be mixed C py
t. rig
gh ht
yri
♦ 1.)
by
Becomes discoloured after mixing (brown) op Vo
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

Note

If “G11” is mixed with “G12+” or “G12++”, the coolant will become


brown in colour.

5.26.3 Checking coolant level, replenish cool‐


ant if necessary
Perform the following jobs:
– Check coolant level in expansion tank with engine cold.

5. Descriptions of work 117


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Recommended coolant level at delivery inspection:


♦ Coolant level above “Min. marking” -arrow-.
Recommended coolant level at inspection service agen
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
olksw not
V
• Slightly above area -arrow-. ed by gu
ara
ris nte
o
– If coolant is too low, add required amount
aut
h according to mixture eo
ra
ratio. ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
Note
erm

ab
ility
ot p

If fluid loss is greater than can be expected through normal use,

wit
is n

h re
determine source and rectify (repair measure).
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
5.26.4 Mixture ratio
Frost protection to Coolant additive G 12 Plus Plus Water

rrectne
-25 °C approx. 40 % approx. 60 %

ss
-35 °C approx. 50 % approx. 50 %

o
cial p

f in
-40 °C approx. 60 % approx. 40 %

form
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
a

Note
iv

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

♦ Coolant additive G 12 Plus Plus prevents frost and corrosion


t.
yi Co
op
damage, scaling and also raises boiling point of coolant. For C py
t. rig
these reasons, the cooling system must be filled all-year-
gh ht
pyri by
round with a coolant and corrosion protection additives.
o Vo
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
♦ Because of its high boiling point, the coolant improves engine
reliability under heavy loads, particularly in countries with trop‐
ical climates.
♦ The coolant concentration must not be reduced by adding wa‐
ter even in warmer seasons and in warmer countries. The
antifreeze portion must be at least 40 %.

5.27 Air filter: Clean housing and renew filter


element

Note

♦ When replacing air filter, make sure that no dirt gets into intake
hose, air mass meter -G70- and air filter cover.
♦ Following each air filter change, programmed values of engine
control unit -J623- must be reset using Guided fault finding
with vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -VAS
5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service information system
-VAS 5052 A- ⇒ page 121 .

Note

In dusty countries, new dust and pollen filter must be fitted as


separate job ⇒ page 110 .

Special tools and workshop equipment required

118 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
AG. Volkswagen AG d Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
agen oes
olksw not
yV gu
♦ Spring-type clip pliers -VAS 5024/A- db ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
♦ Torque wrench -V.A.G 1783-
l purpos

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
♦ Torque screwdriver -VAS 6494- Prote AG.

Perform the following jobs:


Removing
– Before changing air filter, clean outside of components with
compressed air.
– Seal all openings of components using caps or hood covers
immediately after removal.
– Pull connector -1- off intake air temperature sender -G42- and
connector -2- from air mass meter -G70- .
– Remove vacuum hose -3- from air filter cover -6-.
– Remove clamp -4- from intake hose -5- and pull off intake hose
-5-.

5. Descriptions of work 119


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Loosen bolts -arrows- of air filter cover.


– Raise air filter upper part and remove upwards.

– Remove air filter element -1-.


– Clean air filter housing if necessary.
Installing
Perform the following jobs:
– Install new air filter insert -1-.
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
wage es n
– Remove all caps or hood covers from sealed components.
yV
olks ot g
ua
d b ran
ir se tee
tho
u or
Note ss
a ac

ce
le
un

pt
When installing ensure the air filter element -1- is properly seated

an
d
itte

y li
in housing and check if seal is seated securely and completely.
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
Note
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
When installing air filter upper part, ensure that the seal of air filter
element is not moved or trapped and that both parts of housing
are flush.

– Tighten bolts -arrows- of air filter cover. rrectness of i


l purpos

Specified torque: 1.6 ± 0.2 Nm.


nform
ercia

– Push on intake hose -5- and secure clamp -4-.


m

Torque setting: 5.5 Nm.


com

tion in
r

– Push vacuum hose -3- onto air filter cover -6-.


te o

thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

– Then push connector -1- onto intake air temperature sender -


en
ng

t.
yi
G42- and connector -2- onto air mass meter -G70- .
Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

120 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

5.28 Air filter with saturation indicator in dash


panel insert:

Note

When rectifying a saturated filter as a separate job, clean air filter


housing and renew filter element.

Perform the following jobs:


Saturation indicator is located in dash panel insert -K- and dis‐
plays contamination of filter element inc. filter housing.
– Clean air filter housing and renew filter element ⇒ page 118 .
– Resetting programmed values in engine control unit -J623- got
saturation indicator ⇒ page 121 .
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
yV gu
Note ised b ara
nte
or eo
h
ut ra
Industy countries,
ss a
new dust and pollen filter must be fitted as c
separate job ⇒ page 110 .

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
5.29 Resetting programmed values in engine
erm

ab
ility
ot p

control unit
wit
, is n

h re
Perform the following jobs:
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

– Connect vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system - t to the co


VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service information
system -VAS 5052 A- with ignition switched off ⇒ page 102 .
rrectness of i

Note
l purpos

Observe current operating instructions for vehicle diagnostic,


nform
ercia

testing and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic


and service information system -VAS 5052 A- , which are shown
m

at
om

on display after selecting the functions Administration and


ion
c

Operating manual .
in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

– Select “Guided fault finding” on display of vehicle diagnostic,


um
for

testing and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diag‐


en
ng

t.
yi
nostic and service information system -VAS 5052 A- and
Co
Cop py
identify vehicle. ht. rig
rig ht
py by
o Vo
– Select “Powertrain”, “Engine” and then “Functions”. by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
– Select function “01 Reset programmed value”.
– Follow menu instructions to reset programmed values of en‐
gine control unit -J623- .
– Switch off ignition and disconnect vehicle diagnostic, testing
and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic
and service information system -VAS 5052 A- .

5. Descriptions of work 121


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
kswage es n
5.30 Engine oil level: Check
ol ot g
byV ua
d ran
ir se tee
tho
u or
a ac
ss
Note

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

In engines with engine codes CFPA, CDBA and CDCA, it is only

y li
erm

ab
possible to assess and check oil level when engine is at operating

ility
ot p

temperature.

wit
, is n

h re
hole

Perform the following jobs:

spec
es, in part or in w

– After shutting off engine, wait at least 3 minutes so that the oil

t to the co
can flow back into the sump.
– Pull out dipstick and wipe with a clean cloth and then push

rrectness of i
dipstick in again to limit stop.
l purpos

– Pull dipstick out again and read oil level.


For dipstick as illustrated:

nform
ercia

-A- Oil must not be replenished.


m

at
om

i
-B- Oil may be replenished. It may happen that the

on
c

in t
oil level afterwards is in the -A- region.
or

his
ate

-C- Oil must be replenished. It is sufficient if the oil do


priv

c
level is in the -B- region (hatched area) after‐
um
for

wards.
en
ng

t.
yi Co
op py
There is a danger of damaging the catalytic converter if the oil
t. C rig
gh ht
yri
level is above the -A- marking. p by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
– If the oil level is below the -C- mark, replenish oil up to the Prote AG.
-A- mark.

5.31 Engine oil: Drain or extract; renew oil fil‐


ter and replenish engine oil
In the case of difficult operating conditions such as:
♦ operation with fuel containing sulphur
♦ with frequent short trips,
♦ in areas with high levels of dust,
♦ with frequent trips carrying a full load or pulling a trailer,
♦ with a high number of cold starts,
♦ and when the vehicle is used for a long time in areas with ex‐
tremely low temperatures,
♦ the engine oil should be changed more often than indicated in
the service schedule.
Stopping and starting, such as in urban traffic, also puts vehicles
with diesel particulate filter under greater stress (severe operating
conditions). Use, in these conditions is an additional load on the
engine oil which is taken into account by the flexible service in‐
terval system.
– Draining or extracting engine oil ⇒ page 123
– Renewing oil filter ⇒ page 123 .
– Replenishing engine oil ⇒ page 126 .

122 5. Descriptions of work


n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
ho
ir se tee Amarok 2011 ➤
t or
au aMaintenance
c - Edition 10.2012
ss

ce
e
nl

pt
5.31.1 Draining or extracting engine oil

du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p
Note

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
For engines with standing oil filter the oil filter must be renewed
es, in part or in w

before changing the engine oil. When removing the filter element

t to the co
a valve is opened, the oil in the filter housing automatically flows
into crankcase.

rrectness of i
Special tools and workshop equipment required
l purpos

♦ Used oil collection and extraction unit -VAS 6622-


♦ Oil filter strap wrench

nform
ercia

♦ Oil spill cloth -VAS 6204/1-


m

at
om

ion
Draining or extracting engine oil
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

c
Note

um
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
For engines with standing oil filter the oil filter must be renewed C py
t. rig
before changing the engine oil. When removing the filter element
gh ht
pyri by
a valve is opened, the oil in the filter housing automatically flows
co Vo
by lksw
cted
into crankcase.
agen
Prote AG.

Perform the following jobs:


– Extract engine oil using used oil collection and extraction unit
-VAS 6622- .
Or
– Removing and installing skid plate ⇒ page 150 .
– Remove oil drain plug.
– Let engine oil drain.

Note

The oil drain plug and seal are one unit and must be renewed
together.

– Screw in oil drain plug together with seal hand-tight and then
tighten to specified torque.
Specified torques for oil drain plug
♦ Diesel engines: 30 Nm
♦ Petrol engines: 30 Nm

WARNING

♦ Torque specifications must not be exceeded.


♦ Excessive torque can cause leaks in the area of the oil
drain plug or even damage.

5.31.2 Renewing oil filter


♦ Renewing oil filter, engine with engine codes CDBA, CDCA
⇒ page 124

5. Descriptions of work 123


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

♦ Renewing oil filter, engine with engine code CFPA


⇒ page 125

5.31.3 Renewing oil filter, engine with engine


codes CDBA, CDCA
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Torque wrench -V.A.G 1331-

Removing
Perform the following jobs:

Note

♦ Before draining or extracting release threaded cap, so that the


engine oil can flow out of filter housing.
♦ Prevent engine oil from dripping onto components in engine
compartment.
♦ Observe disposal regulations! agen
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
olksw not
yV gu
♦ Oil new O-rings before isinstalling.
ed b ara
nte
or eo
h
aut ra
– Loosen threaded scover -1- on hexagonal flats or along perim‐
s c
eter and remove.
ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

– Clean sealing surfaces on threaded cap and oil filter housing.


y li
erm

ab

Installing
ility
ot p

wit
is n

Perform the following jobs:


h re
ole,

spec

– Renew filter element -5-.


urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co

– Renew O-rings -2-, -3- and -4-.


– Screw in threaded cover -1- hand-tight and then tighten firmly
to prescribed torque.
rrectness

Specified torque: 25 Nm
o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

124 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

5.31.4 Renewing oil filter, engine with engine


code CFPA

Note

Observe disposal regulations!

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Torque wrench -V.A.G 1331-

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
aut ra
ss c

ce
le

♦ Oil filter tool -VAS 3417-


un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

Or

nform
ercia

♦ Oil filter with tensioning strap Hazet - 2171-1


m

a
com

tion in
♦ Oil spill cloth -VAS 6204/1-
r
te o

thi
s
iva

Or
do
r
rp

cum
fo

♦ Universal cloth -VAS 6385-


en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
Removing C py
t. rig
gh ht
yri
Perform the following jobs:
p by
o Vo
by c lksw
cted agen
– Loosen oil filter -arrow- with oil filter tool -VAS 3417- and re‐
Prote AG.

move filter.
– Clean sealing surface for example with universal cloth -VAS
6385- .
Installing
Perform the following jobs:
– Oil rubber seal lightly on new oil filter.
– Screw on new filter and tighten.
Specified torque: 22 ± 2 Nm

5. Descriptions of work 125


AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
Amarok 2011 ➤ rise
d b ara
nte
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012 autho eo
ra
ss c

ce
le
5.31.5 Replenishing engine oil

un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
VW engine oil standards

erm

ab
ility
ot p
Engine oil capacities see ⇒ Engine lubrication; Rep. gr. 17

wit
is n

h re
General notes

ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh
Perform the following jobs:

t to the co
– After replenishing with oil, wait at least 3 minutes and then
check oil level.

rrectne
Note

ss o
cial p

f i
It is absolutely necessary to perform oil level check with the en‐

nform
gine warm in order to ensure correct assessment of the oil level.
mer

atio
om

n
c

– Pull out dipstick, wipe with a clean cloth and push dipstick in

i
or

n thi
again to limit stop.
te

sd
iva

o
pr

c
– Pull dipstick out again and read oil level.

um
r
fo

en
ng

t.
For dipstick as illustrated:
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh
-A- Oil must not be replenished.
ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
-B- Oil may be replenished. It may happen that the
by
cted agen
Prote
oil level afterwards is in the -A- region.
AG.

-C- Oil must be replenished. It is sufficient if the oil


level is in the -B- region (hatched area) after‐
wards.
There is a danger of damaging the catalytic converter if the oil
level is above the -A- marking.
– If the oil level is below the -C- mark, replenish oil up to the
-A- mark.
VW engine oil standards

5.32 Engine and components in engine com‐


partment (from above and below): Per‐
form visual check for leaks and damage
Perform the following jobs:
– Check engine and components in engine compartment for
leaks and damage.
– Check lines, hoses and connections of
♦ Fuel system
♦ Cooling and heating system
♦ And brake system
for leaks, abrasions, porosity and brittleness.

Note

♦ Arrange for defects to be rectified as repair measures.


♦ If fluid loss is greater than can be expected through normal
use, determine source and rectify (repair measure).

126 5. Descriptions of work


AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
ise nte
thor eo Amarok 2011 ➤
u ra
ss a c Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

ce
e
nl

pt
5.33 du Bonnet catch: Clean, ensure attach‐

an
itte

y li
erm

ment is secure and lubricate

ab
ility
ot p

wit
Special tools and workshop equipment required
, is n

h re
hole

♦ Universal cloth -VAS 6385-

spec
es, in part or in w

Perform the following jobs:

t to the co
– Clean bonnet catch -arrow- with cleaning solution -D 009 401
04- and, for example, a universal cloth -VAS 6385- . Also use

rrectness of i
“compressed air” to clean if necessary.
l purpos

nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

– Lubricate bonnet catch -arrow- with grease -G 000 150- .


– Unscrew one of two bolts -1- and clean contact surfaces
-arrows- with cleaning solution -D 009 401 04- and, for exam‐
ple, universal cloth -VAS 6385- .

Note

Do not, under any circumstances, loosen or unscrew both bolts


-1-.

5. Descriptions of work 127


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
ir se tee
tho
u or
a ac
ss

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
– Screw cleaned bolt back in hand-tight and then tighten firmly
yi Co
op py
to prescribed torque. t. C rig
gh ht
pyri by
Specified torque: 25 Nm
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
– Then unscrew second bolt -1- and clean contact surfaces
-arrows- with cleaning solution -D 009 401 04- and, for exam‐
ple, universal cloth -VAS 6385- .
– Screw second cleaned bolt back in hand-tight and then tighten
firmly to prescribed torque.
Specified torque: 25 Nm

5.34 Check breakdown set


♦ Breakdown set location ⇒ page 128
♦ Check minimum use-by date ⇒ page 129

5.34.1 Breakdown set location


Model Location
2H In drawer under driver or front passenger seat

128 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note

If the breakdown set is not found at the fitting location described,


this can be found in ⇒ vehicle wallet .

5.34.2 Check minimum use-by date


The breakdown set consists of the compressor and a tyre filler
bottle with sealant .
Because the sealant in the tyre filler bottle has a limited expiry
date, this date is indicated on the bottle -arrow-.
Perform the following jobs:
– Check the expiry date and renew the tyre filler bottle with seal‐
ant , if the expiry date is reached.
This example shows that the expiry date 05/2003. The tyre filler
bottle with sealant must be renewed.
The tyre filler bottle with sealant is available as replacement part.
The part number can be found in ⇒ Electronic parts catalogue
“ETKA” .

Caution

If the tyre filler bottle with sealant was opened e.g. at a "flat
tyre", it must be renewed.

Note
. Volkswage
♦ Residual tyre sealant
ksw
agenor bottles which
AG
are
n AG d
oesfilled and the expiry
date has been y V exceeded, must be disposed tof.
ol n o g
ua
db ran
ir se
♦ Old tyreth sealant or residual sealant must not be mixed
o tee
or and
disposed
ss
au
of with other fluids. ac
ce
le
un

pt

Disposing of tyre sealant ⇒ Handbook Service Organisation; En‐


an
d
itte

y li

vironment protection and disposal practice; Chapter 3 Funda‐


erm

ab

mentals; Chapter. 6.5 .


ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re

5.35 Performing road test


ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

Which of the following can be checked depends on vehicle equip‐


t to the co

ment and local conditions (urban/country).


Check the following during a road test:
rrectne

– Engine: Output, misfiring, idling speed, acceleration.


s

– Clutch: Pulling away, pedal pressure, odours.


s o
cial p

f i

– Gear selection: Ease of operation, stick position.


nform
mer

– Braking to clear brake discs: drive approx. 500 m in 2nd gear


atio
m

at 50 to 60 km/h. Brake slightly several times, then brake


o

n
c

strongly 3 times. It is also possible to allow the brakes to drag


i
or

n thi
e

for approx. 4 minutes for each vehicle axle on the single-axle


t

sd
va

roller dynamometer.
i

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

– Foot brake and handbrake: Function, free travel and effec‐


yi
t.
Co
tiveness, pulling to one side, juddering, squeal.
t. Cop py
rig
gh ht
yri
– ABS function: Pulsing must be felt at the brake pedal during
p by
co Vo
ABS-regulated braking.
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5. Descriptions of work 129


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Steering: Function, steering free clearance, steering wheel


centred when vehicle is travelling straight ahead
– Radio/radio navigation system: Function, reception, GALA, in‐
terference noise
– Multi-function indicator (MFI): Functions
– Air conditioning system: Function
– Vehicle: Pulling to one side when travelling straight-ahead
(level road)
– Imbalance: Wheels, drive shafts, propshaft
– Wheel bearings: Noises
– Engine: Hot starting behaviour

5.36 Wheel securing bolts: Tighten to speci‐


fied torque n AG. Volkswagen A ge G do
swa es n
Special tools and workshop equipment required
by
Vol
k ot g
ua
d ran
se
♦ Torque wrench -V.A.G 1332/- (40-200
tho
ri Nm) tee
or
au ac
ss

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
and if necessary, if anti-theft wheel bolts are installed: rrectness of i
l purpos

♦ Adapter set for tamper-proof wheel bolts -T10101-


nf
ercia

Or
rm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

♦ Adapter set for tamper-proof wheel bolts -T10190-


Pulling off wheel hub trim.
• Only applies to steel wheel
The puller hooks to remove the cover caps are located with the
vehicle tool kit.
Perform the following jobs:
– Insert wire hoop through opening in cover cap.
– Pull off cap with wire hoop.

130 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Loosening anti-theft wheel bolts.


AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
Note d by ara
rise nte
tho eo
u ra
To loosen the
ss a theft-resistant wheel bolts a special adapter is re‐ c
quired, located in vehicle tool kit or use adapter set for tamper-

ce
le
un

pt
proof wheel bolts -T10101- or adapter set for tamper-proof wheel

an
d
itte

bolts -T10190-

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

– Push adapter -2- into anti-theft wheel bolt -1- onto stop.

wit
, is n

h re
– Push wheel brace onto adapter -2- onto stop.
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

– Unscrew wheel bolt by about one turn.

t to the co
Screw in wheel bolts hand-tight and then tighten to prescribed
torque setting.

rrectness of i
l purpos

Note

nform
ercia

Ensure that wheel bolts are tightened diagonally and alternately


to the following specified torque:
m

a
com

tion in
Specified torque: 180 Nm
r
te o

thi
s
iva

– Place puller hooks and adapter with vehicle tool kit after com‐
do
r
rp

c
pleting work.
um
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
5.37 Reading radio code
C py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.
Note

Only valid for vehicles without sticker with serial number and radio
code on vehicle data sticker.

Reading radio code using vehicle diagnostic, testing and infor‐


mation system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service
information system -VAS 5052 A-
Authorization prerequisites for reading radio code
• The vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -VAS
5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service information system
-VAS 5052 A- is connected via the “Central Partner
Network” (CPN) with the central database (Carport, Fazit).
• Available access for the user of the system “GeKo” (secrecy
and component protection)

Note

♦ The radio codes are read in the central database (Carport,


Fazit) and are indicated on display of vehicle diagnostic, test‐
ing and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic
and service information system -VAS 5052 A- .
♦ To activate the anti-theft coding the radio code must be en‐
tered using radio buttons, as previously ⇒ page 133 .

Perform the following jobs:


– Connect vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -
VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service information
system -VAS 5052 A- with ignition switched off ⇒ page 102 .

5. Descriptions of work 131


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Switch on ignition.
– Press the Guided functions button on display of vehicle di‐
agnostic, testing and information system -VAS 5051B- or ve‐
hicle diagnostic and service information system -VAS 5052
A- .
– Press > button to confirm selection.
– Then perform vehicle identification on vehicle diagnostic, test‐
ing and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic
and service information system -VAS 5052 A- .
– Select one after another:
♦ Brand
♦ Type
♦ Model year
♦ Version
♦ Engine code
– If the vehicle identification has been performed correctly, con‐
firm with > button.
– Select one after another:
♦ Radio system
♦ Reading radio code
– Follow instructions of vehicle diagnostic, agen testing and informa‐
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
tion system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle olksw diagnostic and service not
y V gu
information system -VAS 5052 ise
d b
A- to read the radio code ac‐ ara
nte
cording to “Guided functions”.
ut
hor eo
r
sa ac
Exit radio code reading sas follows:
ce
le
un

pt

– Select function GoTo on display.


an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab

– Press function End on display.


ility
ot p

wit
is n

– Select function End in “End menu”.


h re
ole,

spec

– Switch off ignition and separate diagnosis connection from


urposes, in part or in wh

vehicle.
t to the co

Note
rrectne

Inform the customer about the radio code.


ss o
cial p

Reading radio code using “ElsaWin” (Electronic Service Informa‐


inform

tion System) and Vehicle Individual Service Notes “FISH”


mer

atio
m

Reading the radio code was integrated with “ElsaWin” (Electronic


o

n
c

Service Information System) version 3.1 into Vehicle Individual


i
or

n thi

Service Notes “FISH”. Currently this function is only valid for


te

sd
va

Volkswagen and Commercial vehicles.


i

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

132 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Note

♦ Radio codes cannot be read in “FISH” with the previous ac‐


cess authorization for radio codes. Reading only functions with
the access authorization for “GeKo” (secrecy and component
protection).
♦ The access authorization for “GeKo” (secrecy and component
protection) for reading the radio code using vehicle diagnostic,
testing and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diag‐
nostic and service information system -VAS 5052 A- is also
valid for reading the radio code in Vehicle Individual Service
Notes “FISH”.

Authorization prerequisites for reading radio code


G. Volkswagen AG d
• Available access for the user of the system “GeKo”
lksw
agen(secrecy
A
oes
not
and component protection) by
Vo gu
ara
ed nte
ris
Perform the following jobs: utho eo
ra
sa c
– Follow the instructions of Service Notes Vehicles Individual

ce
e

“FISH” in Electronic Service Information System “ElsaWin”.


nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
Note
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
♦ To read the radio code the radio serial number must be en‐
hole

spec
tered fully. This can be entered using vehicle diagnostic, test‐
es, in part or in w

ing and information system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic

t to the co
and service information system -VAS 5052 A- via “Guided
functions” and “Measured value block 81”. For this follow in‐
structions of vehicle diagnostic, testing and information sys‐

rrectness of i
tem -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service informa‐
tion system -VAS 5052 A- .
l purpos

♦ To enter the radio serial number the 17-digit chassis number


is taken from the order.

nf
ercia

orm
♦ If you are authorized to read the radio code via “GeKo” (se‐
m

atio
m

crecy and component protection), you will obtain the 4-digit


o

n in
c

radio code to the radio serial number.


or

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

Note
t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh
Inform the customer about the radio code.
ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.
5.38 Radio / radio navigation system: Enter
anti-theft coding PIN
The anti-theft coding electronically prevents unauthorized per‐
sons from operating the unit after it has been removed from
vehicle. The anti-theft codes are also called radio codes or se‐
curity codes. Security code means that each unit with an anti-theft
coding is programmed with its own code number. This security
code is not active when leaving the factory. The security code is
found on the unit card, if fitted. If the unit card is not fitted, the
security code can be read from a central database using vehicle
diagnosis tester.

5. Descriptions of work 133


AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
ise nte
Amarok 2011 ➤ thor eo
u ra
Maintenance
ss a- Edition 10.2012 c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
Note erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
If an incorrect code number is entered when releasing the elec‐
is n

h re
tronic lock, the whole procedure can be repeated once. If an
ole,

spec
incorrect code number is entered again, the unit is locked for
urposes, in part or in wh

about one hour. That means, it cannot be used. After one hour,

t to the co
during which time the unit must remain switched on, the display
extinguishes. The electronic lock can be released as described
above. The cycle, two attempts, one hour lock, applies again.

rrectne
Procedure

ss o
Deactivating anti-theft coding ⇒ Infotainment; Rep. gr. 91 .
cial p

f inform
5.39 Radio navigation system: Insert naviga‐
mer

atio
m

tion CD/DVD and perform update


o

n
c

i
or

n thi
e

If no navigation CD/DVD is inserted in the CD/DVD slot, after en‐


t

sd
va

tering the radio code it can be displayed that no navigation CD/


i

o
pr

cum
r

DVD is inserted.
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
In this case, insert the navigation CD/DVD according to ⇒ Oper‐ t. Cop py
ating instructions .
rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.
Note

When the navigation CD is inserted the first time, the radio navi‐
gation system performs an update, which can take up to 5 mi‐
nutes. During this process, the radio navigation system must not
be pulled of and the ignition key must not be removed, otherwise
the navigation system switches off and the update will be inter‐
rupted!

5.40 Timing chain: Renew


– The procedure is described in workshop manual ⇒ Rep. gr.
15 .

5.41 Windscreen wash/wipe system and


headlight washer system: Check func‐
tion and settings
♦ Check antifreeze content of Windscreen Clear with G 052 164,
replenish with fluid if necessary ⇒ page 134
♦ Window wash/wipe system: Check spray jet settings and ad‐
just if necessary ⇒ page 136

5.41.1 Checking Windscreen Clear with anti‐


freeze for windscreen wash/wipe sys‐
tem, replenish with fluid if necessary
Checking antifreeze concentration .
Special tools and workshop equipment required

134 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance
AG. Volkswagen A - Edition 10.2012
agen G do
es n
olksw ot
yV gu
♦ Refractometer -T10007- db ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
Read precise value for the following tests at bright/dark boundary.
Using a pipette, place a drop of water on the glass to improve the
l purpos

readability of the bright/dark boundary. The bright/dark boundary


can be clearly recognised on the “WATERLINE”.

nform
ercia

Perform the following jobs:


m

a
com

tio
– Check concentration of antifreeze additive using refractometer

n in
r

-T10007- (note).
te o

thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

5. Descriptions of work 135


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

The scale -1- of the refractometer is calibrated for Genuine Volks‐


wagen Windscreen Clear with antifreeze G 052 164.
The scale -2- is designed for commercially available windscreen
cleanser as well as a mixture of commercially available wind‐
screen cleanser and genuine Volkswagen Windscreen Clear with
antifreeze G 052 164.
Mixture ratio
Frost protection to Windscreen Clear Water
with antifreeze
G 052 164
-17/-18 °C 1 part 3 parts
-22/-23 °C 1 part 2 parts
-37/-38 °C 1 part
agen
AG. Volkswagen 1dpart
AG o
ksw es n
Vol ot g
Replenishing with fluid.
se
db
y ua
ran
i tee
or
The fluid reservoirautof
h
the window washer system must be filled or a
completely. ss c

ce
le
un

pt
Starting immediately, use only Genuine Volkswagen Windscreen

an
d
itte

Clear with antifreeze G 052 164 all-year-round when replenishing

y li
rm

ab
window wash/wipe system.
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
Note
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

♦ On vehicles with fan-type spray jets, the reservoir must be fil‐ t to the co
led with Windscreen Clear with antifreeze G 052 164, as this
fluid has a low viscosity at temperatures below freezing. Oth‐
rrectness of i

erwise the complicated spray jet system can become blocked


by the crystallised washer fluid, which affects the spray pattern
l purpos

of the spray jet. Windscreen Clear with antifreeze G 052 164


ensures that the fan-type spray jets remain fully functional
even at low temperatures.
nform
ercia

♦ Genuine Volkswagen Windscreen Clear with antifreeze G 052


m

a
com

164 protects the spray jets, fluid reservoir and connecting ho‐
ion in

ses from freezing.


r
te o

thi
s
iva

♦ Also use Genuine Volkswagen Windscreen Clear with anti‐


do
r
rp

freeze G 052 164 in the warmer periods of the year. The


cum
fo

powerful cleanser removes wax and oil residue from the glass.
en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
♦ Frost protection must be guaranteed to approx. -25 °C (ap‐
C py
t. rig
gh
prox. -35 °C in countries with an arctic climate) in the wind‐
ht
pyri by
Vo
o
screen wash/wipe system. by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5.41.2 Window wash/wipe system: Check


spray jet settings and adjust if necessary
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Commercially available Torx screwdriver “T 10”

Note

The spray jets may be cleaned in both directions, also opposite


to direction of spray with compressed air or water.

136 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Windscreen spray jet settings:


The washer jets are preset. However, small height differences
can be compensated for.
Perform the following jobs:
– If spray field is not at correct height, adjust spray directioneup‐
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
wards or downwards as follows: olks
wag es n
o V t gu
by ara
– Adjust spray jet by turning with a commercially
ris available Torx
ed nte
screwdriver “T10” at adjuster -1-. au
tho eo
ra
ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
♦ “Clockwise” lower.

ility
ot p

wit
, is n

♦ “Anti-clockwise” higher.

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
m

5.42 Windscreen wiper blades: Check park


o

n in
or c

position

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
♦ Windscreen wiper blades: Check park position ⇒ page 137 .
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi
5.42.1 Windscreen wiper blades: Check park
Co
Cop py
t. rig
position
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Windscreen of LHD vehicles Prote AG.

Note

For RHD vehicles the wiper blades are aligned as a mirror image.

Driver side
Perform the following jobs:
– Check park position.
Wiper blade tips should be located at marked position -arrow- on
windscreen.
– Adjust park position by moving wiper arm if necessary.
Adjusting windscreen wiper blades ⇒ Electrical system; Rep. gr.
92 ; Windscreen wiper blades - park position .
Front passenger side

5. Descriptions of work 137


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Wiper blade tips should be located at marked position -arrow- on


windscreen.
– Adjust park position by moving wiper arm if necessary.
– Switch windscreen wiper on and off and let it move into park
position.
– Switch off ignition.

5.43 Headlight adjustment: Check, if neces‐


sary adjust
♦ Adjusting halogen headlights ⇒ page 140 .
♦ Adjusting fog lights and other additional lights ⇒ page 141 .
♦ Test prerequisites ⇒ page 138
♦ Checking headlight adjustment (using new test screen without
15° setting line) ⇒ page 139

5.43.1 Test prerequisites


Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Headlight adjustment unit -VAS 5046-

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
byV gu
ara
ed
ris nte
ho eo
aut ra
ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
Or
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

♦ Headlight adjustment unit -VAS 5047-


t to the co
Test and adjustment conditions
♦ Tyre pressure OK
rrectness of i

♦ Lenses must not be damaged or dirty.


l purpos

♦ Reflectors and bulbs OK


nform
ercia

♦ Vehicle must be loaded.


m

Loading: With one person or 75 kg on the driver seat and the


com

tio

vehicle otherwise unloaded (unladen weight).


n in
r
te o

thi

The unladen weight is the weight of vehicle ready for operation


s
iva

do

with a full fuel tank (at least 90 %) including weight of all equip‐
r
rp

cum
fo

ment normally carried (e.g. spare wheel, tools, jack, fire extin‐
en
ng

t.
guisher etc.).
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
If the fuel tank is not at least 90 % full, then load as follows: rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

138 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Perform the following jobs:gen AG. Volkswagen AG d


wa oes
olks no
– Read fuel leveld biny Vfuel tank on fuel gauge. Determine
t gu additional
ara
weight from orisfollowing
e
table and place weight in luggage nte com‐
eo
partment.
au
th
ra
ss c
Fuel gauge table

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

Fuel level of Additional weight

y li
erm

ab
fuel gauge in kg

ility
ot p

1/4 30

wit
, is n

h re
1/2 20
hole

spec
3/4 10
es, in part or in w

t to the co
Full 0
Example:

rrectness of i
When the fuel tank is half full, an additional weight of 20 kg must
l purpos

be placed in the luggage compartment.

nform
ercia

Note
m

at
om

ion
♦ A fuel can filled with water is the best way of adding additional
c

in t
or

weight.

his
ate

do
riv

♦ A fuel can filled with 5 litres of water weighs approx. 5 kg.


p

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
The vehicle must be rolled forward or backward several metres Cop py
t. rig
or front and rear springs must be bounced fully several times so gh ht
yri by
that springs settle.
op Vo
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
♦ Vehicle and headlight adjuster must be on a level surface ⇒
of headlight adjustment unit -VAS 5046- or ⇒ of headlight ad‐
justment unit -VAS 5047-
♦ Vehicle and headlight adjuster must be aligned.
♦ Inclination must be set.
Inclination information in “%” is stamped into trim above headlight.
Headlights must be adjusted according to this information. Per‐
centage given is based on a projection distance of 10 metres. For
example: inclination of 1.0 % converts to approx. 10 cm.
Vehicles with manually regulated headlight range control
♦ Headlight range control thumb wheel must be in basic setting
-0-.

5.43.2 Checking headlight adjustment (using


new test screen without 15° setting line)
Headlights
Perform the following jobs:
♦ Whether, with the dipped beam switched on, the horizontal
bright/dark boundary contacts the dividing line -1- of the test
area and
♦ Whether the breaking point -2- between the horizontal part of
the bright/dark boundary on the left and the rising part on the
right lies on the vertical line of the central point -3-.

5. Descriptions of work 139


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

The bright core of the light beam must be to the right of the vertical
line.

Note

♦ To simplify determination of the breaking point -2-, cover and


uncover left (from driver perspective) half of the headlight a
few times. Then check dipped beam again.
♦ After correct adjustment of dipped beams, the centre point of
the main beam must lie on the centre mark -3-.
♦ For the previous test screen with 15° setting line, adjust as for
new test screen. To avoid incorrect settings, ignore the 15°
setting line.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
Fog lights d by V gu
ara
rise nte
tho eo
– Check whether the upper light-dark
s au border touches the setting ra
c
line and runs horizontally over the entire width of the test
s
ce
e
nl

screen.
pt
du

an
itte

y li

Other additional lights


erm

ab
ility
ot p

Additionally retrofitted lights of other systems must be checked


wit
, is n

and set according to valid guidelines.


h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

5.43.3 Adjusting halogen headlights


nf

Left headlight
ercia

orm
m

Perform the following jobs:


atio
om

n in
c

– Check headlight setting and adjust headlights if necessary.


or

thi
te

sd
a

The adjustment bolts for the right headlight are a mirror image.
iv

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

140 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

♦ Height adjustment bolt -1-


♦ Height/lateral adjustment bolt -2-
– For height adjustment, turn adjustment screws -1- and -2- with
same number of turns.
– For lateral adjustment, only turn adjuster screw -2-.

5.43.4 Adjusting fog lights and other additional


lights
Fog light on left in bumper
. Volkswagen AG
gen AG does
Location of adjustment screw on right fog light is a mirror
Vol
kimage.
swa not
by gu
ara
Inclination: ed nte
oris eo
th
♦ Fog lights 20 cm au ra
c
ss

ce
le

Adjustment screw for setting fog lights can only be accessed from
un

pt
an
d

rear.
itte

y li
rm

ab
Perform the following jobs:
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

– Move adjustment screw -arrow- to regulate headlight range.

h re
hole

spec
A lateral adjustment is not possible.
es, in part or in w

t to the co
Other additional lights
Additionally retrofitted lights of other systems must be checked
and set according to valid guidelines.

rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

a
com

tion in
r
te o

thi

5.44 Service interval display: Reset


s
iva

do
r
rp

cum

Resetting service interval display using VAS vehicle diagnosis


fo

en
g

tester software ⇒ page 142


n

t.
yi Co
Cop py
Resetting service interval display using VAS vehicle diagnosis
t. rig
gh ht
yri by
tester software ⇒ page 142 cop Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote
The service interval display must be reset when the following is
AG.

carried out:
♦ Delivery inspection
♦ Every oil change service and interval service.

Note

♦ Observe the current operating instructions for the vehicle di‐


agnosis system that are shown on the display when the Ad‐
ministration and Operating Manual functions are selected.
♦ The procedure for resetting the service interval display without
the vehicle diagnosis tester is described in the instruction
booklet of the vehicle's manuals.

5. Descriptions of work 141


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

5.44.1 Resetting service interval display using


VAS vehicle diagnosis tester software
Carry out the following work:
– Connect vehicle diagnosis tester ⇒ page 102
– Switch on ignition.
– Select the »Guided functions« field on the screen and carry
out vehicle identification.
– Select one after another:
♦ Brand
♦ Type
♦ Model year
♦ Version
♦ Engine code
– Confirm vehicle identification.
– If vehicle identification has been carried out correctly, confirm
with the > button.
– Select one after another:
♦ “Dash panel insert.”
♦ “Resetting the service interval display”
– Carry out adaptation according to the information given in
“Guided functions”.
End adaptation.
– Select the »GoTo« function on the display and then select
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
»End«. olks
wage es n
o V t gu
by a
– Switch off ignition
ris
ed and separate diagnosis connections.
ran
te
tho eo
After the ignition
ss
au is switched on, the type of service is no longer
ra
c
displayed in the distance display in the dash panel insert.
ce
le
un

pt
an
d

5.44.2 Resetting service interval display using


itte

y li
erm

ab

VAS vehicle diagnosis tester software


ility
ot p

wit
is n

Carry out the following work:


h re
ole,

spec

– Establish a connection to the vehicle ⇒ page 102 and switch


urposes, in part or in wh

on the ignition.
t to the co

– Select »Start diagnosis« on the display.


– Identify »Basic characteristics of vehicle«.
rrectne

– Deactivate »Work with guided fault finding« and confirm with


s

»Accept«.
s o
cial p

f i

– Select control unit, dash panel insert and select »Guided func‐
nform

tions« with right mouse click.


mer

atio
m

– Execute »Reset service interval«.


o

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

142 5. Descriptions of work


n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran Amarok 2011 ➤
ir se te
o
auth Maintenance - eEdition
or
ac 10.2012
ss

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte
Note

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p
♦ It is not necessary to log in in order to enter or call up vehicle

wit
is n
data.

h re
ole,

spec
♦ If the options indicated in the working procedure are not shown

urposes, in part or in wh
on the display ⇒ Operating instructions for vehicle diagnosis

t to the co
tester

5.45 Service interval display: Adapt (export)

rrectness
Caution

o
cial p

f inform
♦ Diesel engines: In some regions/countries, an elevated
mer

sulphur content may be evident in the diesel fuel. This

atio
om

leads to increased wear of the cylinders and impairs piston

n
c

i
or

n
cleanliness considerably. Short service intervals therefore

thi
te

apply in this instance.

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
Note
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
♦ With this function, the service interval display is adapted for
Prote AG.

vehicles without LongLife service (PR number “QG0/QG2”).


♦ If this function is performed on vehicles with LongLife service,
the extended service interval (ESI) is deactivated.
♦ Note the shorter service intervals for the respective country in
the chapter entitled »Oil change interval in relation to sulphur
content in fuel «

Carry out the following work:


– Connect vehicle diagnosis tester ⇒ page 102
– Switch on ignition.
– Select the »Guided functions« field on the screen and carry
out vehicle identification.
– Select one after another:
♦ Brand
♦ Type
♦ Model year
♦ Version
♦ Engine code
– Confirm vehicle identification.
– If the vehicle identification has been performed correctly, con‐
firm with > button.
– Select one after another:
♦ “Dash panel insert.”
♦ “Adapting the service interval”
– Perform adaptation according to the information of “Guided
functions”.

5. Descriptions of work 143


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

End adaptation.
– Confirm end of interval adaptation with the »Done« button.
– Exit “Guided functions”.
– Switch off ignition and separate diagnosis connections.

5.46 Track rod ends: Check clearance, se‐ AG. Volkswagen AG d


agen
curity and boots by Volksw
oes
not
gu
ara
ed nte
Perform the following jobs: horis e
ut or
ac
– sa
With vehicle raised (wheels hanging free), check sclearance by

ce
le
moving track rods and wheels:

un

pt
an
d
itte
Clearance: Zero clearance

y li
erm

ab
ility
– Check mountings.
ot p

wit
is n

– Check that boots -arrow- are not damaged and are seated

h re
ole,

correctly.

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
rrectness o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
e

5.47 Power assisted steering: Check fluid


t

sd
iva

o
pr

c
level

um
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
♦ Oil at operating temperature ⇒ page 145 Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
yri
♦ Fluid cold ⇒ page 144 p by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
5.47.1 Fluid cold
Prote AG.

Test prerequisites
• Engine switched off
Perform the following jobs:
– Unscrew sealing cover -arrow- with built-in dipstick from tank.
– Wipe off dipstick using a clean cloth.
– Screw sealing cover on until finger tight and then unscrew
again. Following this, fluid level can be checked.
The oil level must be in the area of the “20°C” mark.

Note

♦ If the fluid level is above the area specified, the excessive fluid
must be extracted.
♦ If the oil level is below the area specified, the hydraulic system
must be checked for leaks (repair measure) and, if necessary,
topped up with hydraulic oil -G 002 000- .

– Screw sealing cover onto container until finger tight (1.5 +


0.5 Nm).

144 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

5.47.2 Oil at operating temperature


Test prerequisites
• Engine switched off
Perform the following jobs:
– Unscrew sealing cover -arrow- with built-in dipstick from tank.
– Wipe off dipstick using a clean cloth. AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
ksw
– Screw sealing cover on until finger tight and then by Vunscrew
ol not
gu
ara
again, after which fluid level can be checked. rised
nte
ho eo
ut
The oil level must be in the area of the “80°C”
ss a mark. ra
c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

Note

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

♦ If the fluid level is above the area specified, the excessive fluid

wit
, is n

must be extracted.

h re
hole

spec
♦ If the oil level is below the area specified, the hydraulic system
es, in part or in w

must be checked for leaks (repair measure) and, if necessary,

t to the co
topped up with hydraulic oil -G 002 000- .

– Screw sealing cover onto tank until finger tight.

rrectness of i
l purpos

5.48 Doors: Grease door arrester

nf
ercia

Perform the following jobs:

orm
m

– Lubricate door arrester at positions marked -arrows-.

atio
om

n in
c

– Use lubricating paste -G 000 150- or lock cylinder lubricating


or

thi
e

spray -G 052 778 A2- .


t

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5.49 Paint: Perform visual check for damage


and corrosion, interior and exterior when
doors and bonnet/rear lid/flaps are open
Perform the following jobs:
– Visual check on paint for damage and corrosion, interior and
exterior when bonnet/rear lid/doors and flaps are open.
– After the visual check, tick the corresponding field in the serv‐
ice record.
If damage is determined during visual check, make entries in the
service schedule:
– Put a cross in “Repair recommendation” on “Service record”
page in service schedule.
– Additionally describe exactly what part of vehicle is affected or
damaged etc. in field “Notes” below “Workshop comments” in
the service schedule.

5. Descriptions of work 145


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
Note ed by
V gu
ara
ris nte
ho eo
ut
♦ Inform the customer when faults are found
s a during visual check ra
c
and repair measures are necessary. s

ce
le
un

pt
♦ Faults found must always be rectified (repair measure). There‐

an
d
itte

y li
fore, further damage and corrosion and rusting through can be

rm

ab
avoided.

pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
5.50 Protective foil: Remove (if fitted)
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
Note

rrectness of i
The foil must “NOT” be removed from the rear bumper on Amarok
models in “Russia” with chrome bumpers.
l purpos

Reason:

nform
ercia

In Russia, the roads are gritted with calcium chloride in winter.


m

a
This aggressive substance could corrode the chrome coating.
com

tion in
r

5.51 Underbody protection: Perform visual


te o

thi
s
iva

check for damage

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
g

During visual check, also check floor pan, wheel housings and
n

t.
yi Co
op
sills. C py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Note Prote AG.

Faults found must always be rectified (repair measure). This in‐


hibits corrosion and rusting through.

5.52 Clock: Set to correct time


Vehicles without digital tachograph
– Setting buttons -A and B- are located in dash panel insert -K- .

Note

Clock -B- can only be set when the time is displayed in the dash
panel insert -K- and is not overlaid with another display.

Perform the following jobs:


– Switch on ignition.

146 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– To access hour display -B- in dash panel insert -K- , press


button -A-.
– Briefly pressing 0.0 / SET -A- changes time by one hour for
every press.

– Pressing 0.0 / SET -A- for longer changes hour value quick‐
ly.

– Press button -A- again to mark the minute display.


– Briefly pressing 0.0 / SET -A- changes time by one minuteagen AG. Volkswagen AG do
w es n
for every press. yV
olks ot g
u b ara
ed nte
oris e
th or
au ac
ss

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

– Pressing 0.0 / SET -A- for longer changes minute value


t to the co
quickly.
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

5. Descriptions of work 147


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
swage es n
– Pressing -A- button again finishes
byV
olk
time setting. ot g
ua
d ran
ir se tee
tho
u or
a ac
ss

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
5.53 Camshaft drive toothed belt and toothed

rrectness of i
belt tensioning roller: Renew
l purpos

– The procedure is described in workshop manual ⇒ Rep. gr.


15 .

nform
mercia

5.54 Camshaft drive toothed belt: Check con‐

at
om

ion
dition
c

in t
or

his
ate

Applicable to

do
priv

cum
for

♦ Diesel engines in “dusty” regions


en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
♦ Diesel engines
C py
t. rig
gh ht
yri by
Perform the following jobs: cop Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
– Remove toothed belt guard ⇒ Rep. gr. 15 .
– Check toothed belt condition, looking for:
♦ -A- Cracks, cross-sectional breaks, cracks (coating)
♦ -B- Side contact
♦ -C- Fraying of cord strands
♦ -D- Cracks (in teeth base)
♦ Layer separation (toothed belt body, draw strands)
♦ Surface cracks (synthetic coating)
♦ Traces of oil and grease

Note

If faults are found always renew toothed belt. This will avoid pos‐
sible breakdowns or operating problems. The replacement of a
toothed belt is a repair measure.

5.55 Toothed belt for water pump: renew


– You can find the operating instruction in the repair guide ⇒
Engine cooling; Rep. gr. 19 ; Removing and installing timing
belt for coolant pump .

5.56 Toothed belt for balancer shaft: renew


– You can find the operating instruction in the repair guide ⇒
Engine cylinder head, timing gear; Rep. gr. 15 ; Assembly
overview - balance shaft timing chain .

148 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

5.57 Spark plugs: Renew

Note

Observe disposal regulations!

Special tools and workshop equipment required


♦ Torque wrench -V.A.G 1331/-

. Volkswagen AG
gen AG does
swa
♦ Spark plug socket y V and extension -VAS 3122B- t gua
olk no
d b ran
e
ris tee
tho or
au ac
ss
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co

♦ Puller -T40039-
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5. Descriptions of work 149


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Removing
Perform the following jobs:
– Pull out all ignition coils with final output stage from cylinder
head approx. 30 mm using puller -T40039- .

– Release connector -arrows- and simultaneously pull all con‐


nectors off ignition coils with final output stage.
– Remove ignition coil with output stage.
– Unscrew spark plugs using spark plug socket and extension -
VAS 3122B- .
Installing
Perform the following jobs:
– Install new spark plugs using spark plug socket and extension
-VAS 3122B- . . Volkswag AG en AG
agen does
Specified torques: 30 Nm
yV
olks
w not
gu
b ara
ed
– Insert all ignition
ho
ris coils with output stages loosely into spark nte
eo
plug shaft. s aut ra
c
s
ce
e
nl

pt

– Align ignition coil with final output stage to connector


du

an
itte

-arrows- and fit simultaneously.


y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

Note
h re
hole

spec

Do not strike with a hammer or other types of tools.


es, in part or in w

t to the co

– Evenly push ignition coils with final output stages onto spark
plugs by hand.
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
ercia

5.58 Removing and installing skid plate


m

at
om

Torque wrench -V.A.G 1331- (6-50 Nm)


ion
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
riv

Note
p

cum
for

en
ng

t.
Get a second mechanic to help you to remove and install skid
yi Co
op
plate.
C py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
Perform the following jobs: Prote
cted AG.
agen

150 5. Descriptions of work


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Unscrew bolts -2-, -3- and -4- one after another.


– Remove skid plate -1- in -direction of arrow-.

Note

The assembly steps are basically a reverse of the dismantling


procedure.

– Screw in bolts hand-tight and then tighten to prescribed torque


setting.
Specified torques: 20 Nm

5.59 Steering: Check bellows for leaks and


damage
Perform the following jobs:
– Check bellows of steering -arrow- for leaks and damage on
respective side.

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
aut ra
ss c
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
om

n in
or c

thi
te

sd
iva

o
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

5. Descriptions of work 151


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
ksw
6 Exhaust emissions test d by Vol not
gu
ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
s c
Note s

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
The following exhaust emissions test description is applicable
itte

y li
erm

only in countries where no specific exhaust emission regulations

ab
ility
have to be adhered to.
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

Exhaust emissions test intervals in Germany:

spec
es, in part or in w

Vehicles with regulated catalytic converter or vehicles with diesel

t to the co
engine:
♦ 3 years after initial registration and then every 2 years.

rrectness of i
♦ Vehicles for commercial passenger transport, e.g. taxis: every
l purpos

12 months
General for exhaust emissions test ⇒ page 152

nform
ercia

Exhaust emissions test for petrol engines with engine code CFPA
m

at
⇒ page 153
om

ion
c

in t
Exhaust emissions test for diesel engines with engine codes
or

his
e

CDBA, CDCA ⇒ page 160


at

do
priv

cum
Exhaust emissions test with OBD ⇒ page 163
for

en
ng

t.
yi
6.1 General information for exhaust emis‐
Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh
sions test
ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

6.1.1 Exhaust emissions test intervals


Vehicles with petrol and diesel engine and OBD:

Note

♦ Observe country-specific legal regulations.


♦ Exhaust emissions test badges are omitted as of 1 January
2010; only the main inspection badges are then available.
♦ Existing exhaust emissions test badges will be removed from
the vehicle by the test centres at the next main inspection or
so-called "repair badges" will be affixed over them.
♦ If the OBD test is carried out, the inspector must issue an ex‐
haust emissions test record according to Annex VIII No.
3.1.1.1 German vehicle licensing regulations.
♦ No obligation of storage and submission exists for the exhaust
emissions test records if the exhaust emissions test record has
been transferred to the main inspection test report by the offi‐
cially recognised expert.

152 6. Exhaust emissions test


n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
ir se te
o
auth Amaroke or2011
ac ➤
ss Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
6.2 Exhaust emissions test for petrol en‐

itte

y li
erm

ab
gines with engine code CFPA

ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

spec
Note

urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
♦ The following description refers to vehicles fitted with “On‐
board diagnosis” (OBD) and regulated catalytic converter.

rrectne
♦ The OBD monitors all components and part systems influenc‐
ing the exhaust emissions quality.

ss o
cial p
Special tools and workshop equipment required

f inform
mer

♦ Emissions testing station -VAS 6300-

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

♦ OBD adapter cable -VAS 5052/16-


♦ Data sheets for exhaust emissions test

Note

♦ It is only possible to carry out an exhaust emissions test when


all units of the emissions testing station -VAS 6300- are con‐
nected properly and combined with each other according to
the ⇒ operating instructions .
♦ All work to be performed is displayed by the emissions testing
station -VAS 6300- .

Test prerequisites
• All test conditions and data required for exhaust emissions test
⇒ Data sheets for exhaust emissions test for respective engine
• For bar code reading the EET data sheet must be printed out.
• Manual gearbox: Gear lever in neutral
• Handbrake pulled on
– Perform exhaust emission test according to instructions on
display.

6. Exhaust emissions test 153


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Initial screen
– Select Exhaust emissions test -arrow- button.
An overview is displayed to select the respective EET type.

– Select EET petrol -arrow-.

The display for warm-up phase appears.


AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
d b ara
rise nte
tho eo
au ra
ss c
ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co

– Continue exhaust emission test according to instructions on


display.
rrectness of i

– If the EET specification selection is displayed, select respec‐


tive “EET specification selection” -arrow-.
l purpos

♦ “Standard values” when an EET is performed for the first time,


nform
ercia

♦ Select “Last vehicle” when an EET is to be carried out again.


m

– Select Continue on display, see -item 1-.


a
com

tion in

The vehicle data input menu is displayed.


r
te o

thi
s
iva

do

Perform the following jobs:


r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

154 6. Exhaust emissions test


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Vehicle data input


♦ Vehicle manufacturer -A-
♦ Key number -B-
♦ Vehicle type -C-
♦ Key number -D- (the first 3 digits)
♦ Vehicle identification number -E-

– Enter items -1…7- of vehicle data from vehicle registration


certificate. . Volkswagen AG n AG d
wage oe
♦ -1- Vehicle manufacturer:
yV
olks “e.g. VOLKSWAGEN
s no
t g - VW”
b ua
ed ran
♦ -2- Vehicle
ho
ris type: “e.g. 2H” tee
t or
au ac
♦ -3- sKey
s number to 2 (old) or 2.1 (new): “e.g. 0603”

ce
le
un

pt
♦ -4- Key number to 3 (old) or 2.2 (new): “e.g. 358”
an
d
itte

y li
♦ -5- Engine code “e.g. CFPA”
rm

ab
pe

ility
ot

♦ -6- Registration number: “e.g. WOB-HH 1234”


wit
, is n

h re
♦ -7- Vehicle identification number: “e.g.
hole

spec
WV1ZZZ2HZYW123456”
es, in part or in w

t to the co

♦ -8- Odometer reading: “e.g. 32000”


rrectness of i

Note
l purpos

♦ Further functions can be called up using GoTo button.


nform

♦ The test can be interrupted using GoTo button.


mercia

a
com

tion in

– Select with OBD -arrow-.


r
te o

thi
s

Specified data input for EET


iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi
Note
Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
yri by
♦ If specifications are not available as bar code, they are to be
cop Vo
by lksw
entered manually. cted agen
Prote AG.

♦ All test conditions and data required for exhaust emissions test
⇒ Data sheets for exhaust emissions test for respective engine

Manual specified data input for EET:


– Perform manual data input according to instructions on dis‐
play.

6. Exhaust emissions test 155


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Enter displayed values on EET data sheet under “Test values


for exhaust emissions test” on display in following sequence:
1- Test speed (idling speed)
2- Warm-up phase for catalytic converter
3- Engine temperature
4- Increased idling speed
5- CO content at increased idling speed
6- Lambda at increased idling speed
7- Idling speed
n AG. Volkswagen AG do
8- Select regulating probe type, either “step-type probe”, or olkswage es n
ot g
“broad-band probe” -item 1-. db
yV ua
ran
e
ris tee
9- Lambda probe value utho or
a ac
ss
– When all data have been entered properly, press Continue

ce
e
nl

pt
button -arrow-.
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
Specified data input for EET as bar code:

ility
ot p

wit
, is n

– If EET nominal data is present in bar code format then read in

h re
bar code of EET data sheet using reader pen.
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

All data required are shown on display.

t to the co
– Press ► -button- to continue procedure.

rrectness of i
l purpos

nf
ercia

orm
m

atio
m

Visual check
o

n in
or c

– Follow instructions on display.

thi
te

sd
iva

o
– Perform visual checks.
r
rp

cu
o

m
f

en
ng

– If visual check is OK press OK button. Press -arrow-.


t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
o
Note
c by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

When not OK button is pressed a check will be carried out.

The visual check is displayed with the request to connect the di‐
agnosis connector -arrow A- and to check the MI lamp
-arrow B-.
– Follow instructions on display.
– Switch off ignition.

156 6. Exhaust emissions test


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Connect diagnosis line connector to EOBD connection.


– Switch on ignition.
– Perform visual check of “MI lamp”.
– If lamp lights up, press Lamp On button -arrow C-.

– Follow instructions on display, see -arrow C- and -arrow A-.


♦ Start engine.
Volkswagen AG
♦ Perform visual check
swof
ageMI lamp.
n AG .
does
olk not
yV gu
– Insert emission ed b probe in exhaust tail pipe. ara
nte
ris
ho eo
aut ra
ss c
Note
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

The exhaust emissions test is only continued when the test probe
y li
erm

ab

is in the exhaust tail pipe.


ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

It is automatically switched to test for readiness of operation.


spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co

It is checked here if all tests for readiness of operation supported


by the control unit have been performed.
rrectness of i

Note
l purpos

♦ If all display values have been set to “0”, a regulating probe


test is not performed.
nform
ercia

♦ If not all display values have been set to “0”, a regulating probe
m

at
om

test will be performed later.


on
c

in t
or

his
ate

– Confirm status of “exhaust emissions warning lamp”


do
priv

-arrow B-.
cum
for

en
ng

t.
Catalytic converter conditioning
yi Co
Cop py
ht. rig
It is automatically switched to warm-up phase of catalytic con‐ rig ht
py by
verter. co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

6. Exhaust emissions test 157


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Follow instructions on display.


Measurement starts when the engine speed has reached the re‐
quired level.
– Keep engine speed within required rpm range.
The remaining time to perform the warm-up phase is displayed
- arrow A -.

Warm-up phase
It is automatically switched to display for measuring engine tem‐
perature.
. Volkswagen AG
– Follow instructions on
swadisplay.
gen AG does
olk not
yV gu
edb ara
is nte
or
Noteauth eo
ra
ss c
ce
e

This is only indicated on display if engine temperature has not


nl

pt
du

an

reached 80 ℃.
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

– Bring engine to required temperature.


wit
, is n

h re
hole

Measurement at increased idling speed:


spec
es, in part or in w

It is automatically switched to display for measuring increased


t to the co

idling speed.
– Follow instructions on display.
rrectness of i

Measurement starts when the engine speed has reached the re‐
l purpos

quired level.
nform
ercia

Note
m

at
om

io

♦ Measurement can be skipped using ► button, i.e. the exhaust


n
c

in t
or

emissions test has failed.


his
ate

do
riv

♦ Measured values are reset using the ← button and the test can
p

cum
or

be repeated.
f

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
. rig
– Keep engine speed within required rpm range.
ht ht
rig by
copy Vo
The remaining time to perform measurement is displayed
by lksw
cted agen
Prote
-arrow A-.
AG.

158 6. Exhaust emissions test


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Measuring idling speed and CO content


It is automatically switched to display for measuring the idling
speed and CO content.
Measurement starts when the engine speed has reached the re‐
quired level.
The remaining time to perform measurement is displayed
. Volkswagen AG
-arrow A-. swagen AG does
k not
Vol gu
Regulating by
dprobe test ara
se ri nte
ho eo
aut ra
ss c
Note

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

The regulating probe test is only performed if “NOT” all display

y li
rm

ab
values have been set to “0”.
pe

ility
ot

wit
, is n

h re
It is automatically switched to display for regulating probe test.
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
Note

The regulating probe test is performed for every lambda probe

rrectness of i
individually.
l purpos

Measurement starts when the engine speed has reached the re‐
quired level.
nform
ercia

– Keep engine speed within required rpm range.


m

a
com

tio

The remaining time to perform measurement is displayed


n in
r
te o

-arrow A-.
thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum

Evaluation
fo

en
ng

t.
yi
When the exhaust emissions test has been performed, the log is
Co
Cop py
shown on display. ht. rig
rig ht
py by
o Vo
The test result is displayed.
by c lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
Now remarks concerning the exhaust emissions test can be en‐
tered -arrow A-. These will then be included in the test log.
– When the exhaust emissions test is classed as passed, select
-arrow B- EET sticker issued in drop-down menu and date.
– Then confirm with Yes , see -arrow C-.

After confirmation, the “2” “TEST CERTIFICATES” are printed out


automatically.
– If further test certificates are required, press -arrow A-
Print button.

– Follow instructions on display.


– Remove exhaust probe from exhaust tailpipe.
– Then press ► -arrow B-.
The exhaust emissions test is completed, a new exhaust emis‐
sions test can be performed.

6. Exhaust emissions test 159


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

6.3 Exhaust emissions test for diesel en‐


gines with engine codes CDBA, CDCA
Special tools and workshop equipment required
♦ Diesel tester -V.A.G 1743-

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
byV gu
ara
ed
ris nte
ho eo
aut ra
ss c

ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

♦ Engine speed adapter -VAS 6296-

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

♦ Data sheets for exhaust emissions test


at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
te

Note
a

do
priv

cum
for

To reach the engine revs limit, the TCS and ESP button -E256-
en
ng

t.
yi Co
has to be pressed. . Cop py
rig
ht ht
rig by
copy Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote
Note
AG.

♦ All test conditions and data required for exhaust emissions test
⇒ Data sheets for exhaust emissions test for respective engine
♦ If possible, the test should be completed outdoors following a
road test. If this is not possible for various reasons (weather,
excessive noise in residential areas), then the test can be car‐
ried out in a workshop.
♦ To reduce noise levels, the bonnet should be closed on first
catch during tests.

Perform the following jobs:


Performing visual check of components that influence pollution.
⇒ Data sheets for exhaust emissions test
– Perform visual check for:
♦ Installation
♦ Completeness

160 6. Exhaust emissions test


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

♦ Leakage
♦ Damage

Note

Faults found are to be rectified.

With ignition switched off, connect testers as follows:


– Pull on handbrake.
– Manual gearbox: Gear lever in neutral
– Connect diesel tester -V.A.G 1743- according to ⇒ operating
instructions with ignition switched off.
– Connect engine speed adapter -VAS 6296- .

Note

♦ Follow ⇒ operating instructions for engine speed adapter -


VAS 6296- !
♦ Strictly follow the safety precautions in the operating instruc‐
tions! AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
y V gu
– Start engineise
d b and run at idling speed. ara
nte
or eo
h
The engine
s aut
speed must now be displayed on diesel tester r a -V.A.G
c
1743-s .
ce
e
nl

pt
du

If the engine speed is displayed incorrectly or not at all, use ⇒


an
itte

y li

operating instructions for VAS 1743 or ⇒ operating instructions


erm

ab

for VAS 6296 to rectify the cause.


ility
ot p

wit

Perform exhaust emissions test according to instructions on die‐


, is n

h re

sel tester -V.A.G 1743- display.


hole

spec

If the following is indicated on display:


es, in part or in w

n rpm mode k 1/m T °C


t to the co

XXX XXXX B X.XX XX

Unit ready to carry out measurements.


rrectness of i

Check idling speed.


l purpos

Idling speed not within specified range:


nform
ercia

Note
m

at
om

ion
c

The idling speed and maximum speed can be checked but not
in t
or

adjusted.
his
ate

do
priv

cum
or

– If the values are not within specified range, a repair measure


f

en
ng

t.
must be made.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
Performing acceleration test.
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
– Press “button for acceleration test”. cted agen
Prote AG.

First, a fresh air comparison is performed.


If the following is indicated on display: n rpm tB s k 1/m Gas T °C M
XXX XXXX -.- X.XX 0 XX -

Current values for temperature and speed are displayed.


The arrow pointing upwards indicates that the unit is waiting for
the throttle burst.

6. Exhaust emissions test 161


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Depress accelerator pedal fully and hold for specified time.


– Check maximum engine speed (not adjustable).

WARNING

If the governed speed (maximum speed) is exceeded, lift off


accelerator pedal immediately and perform repair measures.

– If the values are not within specified range, a repair measure


must be made.
If the unit detects a valid throttle burst (the speed increases con‐
tinually during measuring period “tx”), the following is indicated on
display:
. Volkswagen AG
If the following is indicated on display:
ksw
agen
AG does
not
n rpm tB s k 1/m Gas T °C M
ol XXX XXXX -.- -.- 1 XX -
yV gu
edb ara
ris nte
The display remainsu“frozen”
tho during the evaluation phase (ap‐ eo
ra
prox. 15 seconds).ss a c

ce
le

After the evaluation phase, the display changes to:


un

pt
n rpm tB s k 1/m Gas T °C M

an
d
itte

XXX XXXX X.XX X.XX 1 XX -

y li
erm

ab
The arrow pointing upwards indicates that the unit is waiting for

ility
ot p

the next throttle burst.

wit
is n

h re
ole,

Repeat test 4 times.


spec
urposes, in part or in wh

The following is indicated on display after each throttle burst: n rpm


t to the co
tB s k 1/m Gas T °C M
XXX XXXX X.XX X.XX X XX -

In this way, the unit measures and registers at least four throttle
rrectne

bursts. After the fourth and for each further throttle burst se‐
quence, an average of the last three measurements is performed.
ss

The following is indicated on display after each throttle burst:


o
cial p

n rpm tB s k 1/m Gas T °C M


f in

XXX XXXX X.XX X.XX X XX -


form
mer

After 10 seconds, this display changes to:


atio

tB s k 1/m band width M


om

Average X.XX X.XX X.XX -


n
c

i
or

n thi

After 5 seconds, this display changes to:


te

sd
a

tB s k 1/m band width M


iv

Average X.XX X.XX XX -


pr

cum
r
fo

en

The display remains until a further throttle burst is performed or


ng

t.
yi Co
another measurement is called up. t. Cop py
rig
gh ht
If the opacity figures are equal to or less than the prescribed fig‐ pyri by
Vo
o
by c
ures, cease measurements.
lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
If the determined opacity figure is above the prescribed figure,
locate fault within repair measure framework ⇒ Fault finding en‐
gine

162 6. Exhaust emissions test


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

6.4 Exhaust emissions test with OBD

Note

♦ The following exhaust emission test description is only appli‐


cable in countries where specific exhaust emission regulations
have to be adhered to. agen
AG. Volkswagen AG d
o w es n
olks ot g
♦ In motor vehicles with spark ignition engine
db
yV or compression ua
ran
ignition engine which were initiallyorregistered
ise for use on the tee
road as of 01.01.2008, measurement
auth and processing of the or
ac
exhaust emissions behaviourssare omitted if all readiness co‐

ce
le

des are set.


un

pt
an
d
itte

♦ If “NOT” all readiness codes are set, an exhaust emissions test

y li
erm

ab
must be performed ⇒ page 152 .

ility
ot p

wit
is n

Special tools and workshop equipment required

h re
ole,

spec
♦ Vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -VAS
urposes, in part or in wh

5051B-

t to the co
rrectness o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
iva

o
pr

cum
r
fo

♦ Diagnosis cable 5m -VAS 5051B/1- en


ng

t.
yi Co
op
♦ Vehicle diagnostic and service information system -VAS 5052
C py
t. rig
gh
A-
ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

♦ Diagnosis cable -VAS 5052/3-

Carry out the following procedure:

6. Exhaust emissions test 163


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Perform visual check:


♦ Crankcase breather system connected,
♦ Exhaust system must be leaktight,
♦ Catalytic converter and particulate filter present and undam‐
aged.
Checking and adjusting prerequisites:
♦ Electrical consumers switched off,
♦ Air conditioner switched off,
♦ As of an engine oil temperature of at least 60°C, warm the
engine to at least 80°C by revving freely 10 times up to the rev.
limit.

Note

Faults found are to be rectified.

– Pull on handbrake.
– Manual gearbox: Gear lever in neutral.
– Connect diagnosis cable connector to diagnosis connection
with ignition switched off.
AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen
– Connect vehicle diagnostic, testing and information
olks system -
w oes
not
yV gu
VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and serviceed
b information ara
nte
system -VAS 5052- ⇒ page 102 . ris
tho eo
au ra
– Switch on ignition. ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
rrectness o
cial p

f i

– Press Guided functions button -arrow- on display.


nform
mer

Vehicle identification begins.


atio
om

n
c

– Select brand, vehicle model, model year, etc.


i
or

n thi
te

sd
a

– Confirm vehicle identification.


iv

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

164 6. Exhaust emissions test


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

– Select “Engine” -arrow- in vehicle diagnostic system guided


menu.

AG. Volkswagen AG d
agen oes
olksw not
V gu
d by ara
ise nte
or eo
h
aut ra
ss c

ce
le
un

pt
an
d
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

– Select “Generate readiness code” -arrow-.

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

– Follow instructions of vehicle diagnostic, testing and informa‐

t to the co
tion system -VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service
information system -VAS 5052- .

rrectne
Evaluation:

ss o
cial p

f inform
mer

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
a

After running through readiness code, result appears on screen.


iv

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Note Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
♦ Exhaust emissions test is PASSED when all “ACTUAL values”
o Vo
by c lksw
cted
correspond to “SPECIFICATIONS”.
agen
Prote AG.

♦ If not all readiness codes are set, an exhaust emissions test


must be carried out ⇒ page 152 .

– Print out the evaluation with Print .


– End programme.
– Remove vehicle diagnostic, testing and information system -
VAS 5051B- or vehicle diagnostic and service information
system -VAS 5052- .
– Complete exhaust emissions test record according to Annex
VIII No. 3.1.1.1 German vehicle licensing regulations.
– Close fuse box cover on left under dash panel.

Note

♦ Exhaust emissions test badges are omitted as of 1 January


2010; only the main inspection badges are then available.
♦ Existing exhaust emissions test badges will be removed from
the vehicle by the test centres at the next main inspection or
so-called "repair badges" will be affixed over them.
♦ No obligation of storage and submission exists for the exhaust
emissions test records if the exhaust emissions test record has
been transferred to the main inspection test report by the offi‐
cially recognised expert.

6. Exhaust emissions test 165


Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

7 Glossary
These explanations only apply to “Maintenance Manual”. They
are not necessarily generally valid!
Letter “A” ⇒ page 166
Letter “B” ⇒ page 166
Letter “C” ⇒ page 166
Letter “D” ⇒ page 167
Letter “E” ⇒ page 167
Letter “F” ⇒ page 167
Letter “L” ⇒ page 167
Letter “M” ⇒ page 167
Letter “O” ⇒ page 167
Letter “P” ⇒ page 168
Letter “Q” ⇒ page 168
Letter “R” ⇒ page 168
Letter “S” ⇒ page 168
Letter “T” ⇒ page 168
Letter “W” ⇒ page 169
Letter “X” ⇒ page 169 agen
AG. Volkswagen AG d
oes
olksw not
Letter “A” byV gu
ara
ed
ris nte
ho eo
Term Explanation aut ra
ss c
All Season All-season tyres / all weather tyres All season tyres are all-year-round tyres. The tyres

ce
le
un

pt
are designed to cope with all weather conditions throughout the year.

an
d
itte

y li
rm

ABS The ABS is a regulating system in the brake system, that prevents locking when braking.

ab
pe

ility
(anti-lock brake This helps to maintain directional stability and steerability.
ot

wit
system)
, is n

ATF Gear oil for automatic gearbox h re


hole

(Automatic trans‐ spec


es, in part or in w

mission fluid)
t to the co

ATF level Filling level of ATF in gearbox


rrectness of i
l purpos

Letter “B”
Term Explanation
nform
ercia

Broad-band probe The broad-band probe is also called universal lambda probe (ULP probe). The voltage
m

a
com

of the lambda probe output nearly increases linear. The lambda probe value is deter‐
ion in

mined by a change in voltage. This enables to measure the lambda probe value via a
r
te o

thi

larger measuring range (broad band). The probe is used as before catalytic converter
s
iva

probe.
do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
.
Letter “C”
ht rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
Term Explanation cted agen
Prote AG.

C - tyres C-mark tyres are used as light truck tyres. Use correct inflation pressure when changing
from “Reinforced tyres” to “C-mark tyres”.
CARB requirement “California Air Resources Board” - measures to restrict airborne pollutants

166 7. Glossary
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Term Explanation
CO Carbon monoxide is produced when fuels containing carbon are not combusted com‐
(Carbon monoxide) pletely.
CN Measurement unit for ignition quality of diesel fuel
. Volkswagen AG
(Cetane number) swa
gen AG does
olk not
yV gu
edb ara
ris nte
tho eo
Letter “D” au ra
c
ss

ce
le
un

pt
Term Explanation

an
d
itte

y li
DPF The diesel particulate filter is installed behind the catalytic converter and filters soot

erm

ab
ility
(Diesel particulate particles from emissions.
filter) ot p

wit
is n

h re
ole,

DIN Deutsches Institut für Normung e.V. (German Standards Authority)

spec
urposes, in part or in wh

t to the co
Letter “E”

rrectne
Term Explanation
EN European standard

ss o
EOBD European onboard diagnosis
cial p

f inform
ESP Electronic stabilisation programme (prevents potential vehicle skidding by targeted in‐
mer

tervention in the brake and engine management systems)

atio
om

n
c

i
or

n thi
te

sd
va

Letter “F”
i

o
pr

cum
r
fo

en
ng

Term Explanation
t.
yi Co
Cop py
FAME Fatty acid methyl ester ht. rig
rig ht
py by
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.

Letter “L”
Term Explanation
LongLife service The LongLife service enables extremely long inspection or oil change intervals, de‐
pending on individual driving style and the conditions under which the vehicle is used.
For the LongLife service a special engine oil is required.
LEV Low Emission Vehicle

Letter “M”
Term Explanation
M&S § 36 of StVZO (Germany's highway regulations) defines the identification of a winter tyre
as “M&S”.
MIL American designation for MI lamp -K83-
(Malfunction Indica‐
tor Light)

Letter “O”
Term Explanation
OBD The OBD monitors all components influencing the exhaust emissions quality.
(Onboard diagno‐
sis)

7. Glossary 167
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Letter “P”
Term Explanation
PR number Abbreviation for productionwcontrol
gen AG number. It
. Volkswagen Aidentifies
G do among other things optional
s a es n
equipment, country-specific
y Volk deviations ot g
u b ara
ed nte
oris e
th or
au ac
ss
Letter “Q”

ce
le
un

pt
an
d

Term Explanation
itte

y li
rm

ab
QG0 Vehicles are “not” fitted at the factory with components for LongLife service. For main‐
pe

ility
ot

tenance, the time or distance dependent intervals (non-flexible intervals) apply.

wit
, is n

h re
QG1 Vehicles are fitted at the factory with active LongLife service. This means vehicles have
hole

spec
a flexible service interval display and are fitted with the following components:
es, in part or in w

♦ Flexible service interval display in dash panel insert

t to the co
♦ Engine oil level sensor
♦ Brake pad wear indicator (if fitted)

rrectness of i
l purpos

QG2 The LongLife service is not active at the factory. This means, vehicles have a non-flexible
service interval display (time or distance dependent service intervals) and are fitted with
the following components:

nform
ercia

♦ Non-flexible service interval display in dash panel insert


m

a
com

t
♦ Engine oil level sensor

ion in
r
te o

♦ Brake pad wear indicator (if fitted)

thi
s
iva

do
r
rp

cum
fo

en
ng

t.
yi Co
op
Letter “R”
C py
ht. rig
rig ht
py by
Term Explanation
co Vo
by lksw
cted agen
Prote AG.
RON Measurement unit of the knock resistance of petrol
(Research Octane
Number)
RF “Reinforced”, reinforced tyre, additional designation for tyres with increased load ca‐
pacity

Letter “S”
Term Explanation
SAM (South Ameri‐ South America
can countries)
Step-type probe The step-type probe is also called finger probe or planar lambda probe. The voltage of
the output signal of the lambda probe jumps rapidly. The lambda probe value is deter‐
mined by a change in voltage. The probe is used as after catalytic converter probe.

Letter “T”
Term Explanation
TDI Turbo diesel engine with direct injection
(Turbo Diesel Injec‐
tion)

168 7. Glossary
Amarok 2011 ➤
Maintenance - Edition 10.2012

Letter “W”
Term Explanation
ESI Extended servicing interval

Letter “X”
Term Explanation
XL “Extra Load”, reinforced tyre, additional designation for tyres with increased load ca‐
pacity

n AG. Volkswagen AG do
lkswage es n
o ot g
byV ua
d ran
ir se tee
tho
u or
a ac
ss
ce
e
nl

pt
du

an
itte

y li
erm

ab
ility
ot p

wit
, is n

h re
hole

spec
es, in part or in w

t to the co
rrectness of i
l purpos

nform
mercia

at
om

ion
c

in t
or

his
ate

do
priv

cum
for

en
ng

t.
yi Co
Cop py
t. rig
gh ht
pyri by
Vo
co lksw
by
cted agen
Prote AG.

7. Glossary 169

You might also like